Self Checkout - Barcode scanners Elgin - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Self-checkout scanner/scale with integrated barcode reader and weighing scale
Dimensions	Model-dependent: Short (approx. 12.6 x 10.2 x 7.1 in), Medium (approx. 16.5 x 10.2 x 7.1 in), Long (approx. 20.5 x 10.2 x 7.1 in)
Weight	Approximately 15–25 lbs depending on model
Power Requirements	100–240 VAC, 50–60 Hz, autosensing; AC/DC adapter included
Scanning Technology	360° omni-directional laser scanning; reads 1D and 2D barcodes including UPC/EAN, Code 39, Code 128, DataBar, and more
Scale Capacity	30 lb (0.01 lb increments) or 15 kg (0.005 kg increments); overload up to 150 lb (68 kg) without damage
EAS Deactivation	Optional built-in EAS antenna for deactivating security labels (Sensormatic compatible)
Interfaces	RS-232, IBM, USB (OEM), Keyboard Wedge; supports multiple POS systems
Warm-Up Time	15 minutes after power-up; 60 minutes if unit has been moved from cold storage to reach thermal equilibrium
Maintenance	Clean horizontal and vertical windows twice daily with mild glass cleaner; clear debris chutes daily
Safety	Laser Class II; requires proper grounding and clean power supply
Spare Parts	Replaceable vertical and horizontal scan windows, L-platter, cables, AC/DC adapter
Repair Information	Contact Datalogic technical support or authorized reseller; unit must be returned in original packaging for service
General Information	Manufactured by Datalogic USA, Inc.; Product Reference Guide included (542 pages)

Frequently Asked Questions - Self Checkout Elgin

How do I calibrate the scale on the Elgin Self Checkout?

Calibration requires entering Scale Diagnostic Mode by pressing the Scale Zero Push Button for four seconds. Follow the calibration procedure in Chapter 5 of the manual using certified test weights. After calibration, you must have the scale certified by local weights and measures authorities.

What barcodes does the scanner support?

The scanner supports a wide range of 1D and 2D symbologies including UPC-A/E, EAN-8/13, Code 39, Code 128, Interleaved 2 of 5, Codabar, MSI/Plessey, DataBar, and more. Refer to the full list in the manual.

How do I clean the scanner windows?

Use a non-abrasive, mild water-based glass cleaner and a lint-free cloth. Clean the horizontal and vertical windows at least twice daily. Do not use abrasive cleaners or pads, as they can scratch the windows.

What should I do if the scale does not zero?

First, ensure the platter is clear of debris. Press the Scale Zero Push Button. If the zero light does not come on, clean the debris chutes and try again. If still not zeroing, the scale may need recalibration.

How do I reset the scanner?

Press and hold the Volume/Tone Push Button for about eight seconds. The scanner will beep rapidly, reset, and run the selftest routine. This is useful when the POS terminal has been reset or the scanner stops responding.

Can I change the weighing units from pounds to kilograms?

Yes, but changing weighing modes requires contacting technical support. After changing, the scale must be recalibrated before commercial use.

What are the power supply requirements?

The scanner/scale operates on 100–240 VAC, 50–60 Hz with an autosensing power supply. Use a dedicated outlet with clean earth grounding.

How do I replace the vertical scan window?

Remove the L-platter, then press out the old window from the bezel. Insert the new window, ensuring it seats in the retention tabs. Clean both sides before reinstalling the bezel.

Why is the scanner not reading barcodes?

Check that the scanner is powered on and the green LED is lit. Clean the windows. If the unit is in Sleep Mode, wave your hand over the horizontal window or press the platter. Also verify that the interface cable is properly connected to the POS terminal.

Is the EAS deactivation feature standard?

No, the EAS deactivation antenna is an optional feature. If equipped, it deactivates security labels when items are passed over the platter. Refer to the EAS system documentation for proper operation.

USER MANUAL Self Checkout Elgin

Exterior view of two modern industrial robotic devices with transparent internal compartments and metal frame (no visible text or symbols)

Product Reference Guide

Datalogic USA, Inc.

959 Terry Street

Eugene, OR 97402

USA

Telephone: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

© 2006–2017 Datalogic S.p.A. and its Group companies

An Unpublished Work - All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this documentation or the procedures described therein may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written permission of Datalogic S.p.A. or its subsidiaries or affiliates ("Datalogic" or 'Datalogic USA, Inc."). Owners of Datalogic products are hereby granted a non-exclusive, revocable license to reproduce and transmit this documentation for the purchaser's own internal business purposes. Purchaser shall not remove or alter any proprietary notices, including copyright notices, contained in this documentation and shall ensure that all notices appear on any reproductions of the documentation.

Should future revisions of this manual be published, you can acquire printed versions by contacting your Datalogic representative. Electronic versions may either be downloadable from the Datalogic website (www.datalogic.com) or provided on appropriate media. If you visit our website and would like to make comments or suggestions about this or other Datalogic publications, please let us know via the "Contact Datalogic" page.

Disclaimer

Datalogic has taken reasonable measures to provide information in this manual that is complete and accurate, however, Datalogic reserves the right to change any specification at any time without prior notice.

Datalogic and the Datalogic logo are registered trademarks of Datalogic S.p.A. in many countries, including the U.S.A. and the E.U. All other brand and product names may be trademarks of Datalogic S.p.A. or of Datalogic Group companies, registered in many countries, including the U.S. and the E.U.

All other brand and product names may be trademarks of their respective owners.

Magellan is a trademark of Datalogic S.p.A. or of Datalogic Group companies, registered in many countries, including the U.S. and the E.U.

Patents

See www.patents.datalogic.com for patent list.

Table of Contents

Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION.... 1

Manual Overview 1

How to Use This Manual 2

Technical Support 4

Datalogic Website Support 4

Reseller Technical Support 4

Telephone Technical Support 4

Scanner and Scanner/Scale Features 5

Connections 6

Physical Parameters 7

Scanning 7

Deactivating EAS Labels 7

Weighing 7

Warm-Up Time 8

Electrical Specifications 9

Bar Codes Supported 10

Retail Codes 10

Industrial Codes 10

Dual Bar Codes for Japan (2 label read) 10

Chapter 2. SITE PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION.... 11

Models 12

Pre-Installation Considerations 13

Checkstand Design 14

Scanner Installation 15

Scanner Maintenance 15

References 15

Scanner Usage 16

Site Preparation Overview 16

Ventilation and Spacing 18

Service Access 20

Power Installation 20

Grounding 20

Checkstand Preparation 21

Liquid Spills and Moisture 22

Counter Cutout 22

Checkstand Mounting 30

Checkstand Vibration 30

Installation Overview 30

Unpacking 31

Operational Verification 32

Diagnostic Modes 34

Cables & Connections 36

Remote Scale Display Placement/Installation 37

Lighting Considerations 37

Viewing Angle 38

Remote Display Cabling 39

Placing and Installing the Remote Scale Display 39

Changing Weighing Modes 42

Set-Up & Installation 42

Set-up 42

Installation 44

System Power-Up Recap 48

Chapter 3. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE.... 51

Scanning Items 51

Deactivating Security Labels 53

Proper Weighing Technique 53

Operational Controls 54

Operational Modes 54

Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation 54

Operating Mode 56

Additional Functions 57

Programming 57

Diagnostic Mode 57

Scanner and Scale Reset 57

Scale Adjustments 58

Operational Maintenance 60

Vertical Scan Window Replacement 61

Horizontal Scan Window Replacement (WRG) 64

Chapter 4. PROBLEM ISOLATION ...... 67

Diagnostic Procedures 68

Error Codes 69

Scale Error Reporting 72

Flowcharts 73

Chapter 5. CALIBRATION....81

Description of Calibration Sequence 82

Motion Test 83

Automatic Zero Tracking Test 83

Preparing the Scanner/Scale for Calibration 84

Calibrating the Scale (Pounds & Kilograms) 84

Calibration Verification (U.S. Pounds) 87

Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1) 87

Shift Test 88

Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2) 89

Blanking Test 89

Decreasing-Load Test 90

Return to Zero Test 90

Calibration Verification (Kilograms) 91

Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1) 91

Shift Test (Metric) 92

Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2) 93

Blanking Test 93

Decreasing-Load Test 94

Return to Zero Test 94

Chapter 6. PROGRAMMING ...... 95

Introduction to Label Programming 95

Understanding the Basics 95

Integrating the Scanner With Your Host System 96

Customizing Your Scanner's Operation 96

Programming Overview 98

Programming via Handheld Device 98

What Is Programming Mode? 99

Entering and Exiting Programming Mode. 99

Programming Session 100

LED and Beeper Indicators 104

If You Make a Mistake.... 104

Return to Factory Settings 104

Test Mode 105

General Scanner Features 106

Scanner Button Options 106

Double Read Timeout 108

Laser Timeout 110

Motor Timeout 112

Label Gone Timeout 115

Auxiliary Port Mode 118

Auxiliary Port Baud Rate 120

Laser Failure Mode 124

Productivity Index Reporting (PIR)/Cashier Training (CT) 125

Indication Features 126

Green LED Idle State 126

Power-up Beep Control 127

Good Read Beep Control 128

Good Read Beep Frequency 129

Good Read Beep Length 131

Good Read Beep Volume 132

Good Read When to Indicate 135

Scale Features 137

Scale Enable 137

Scale Enforced Zero Return 138

Scale Interface Type 141

Scale Calibration Notification 143

Scale Intercharacter Delay 144

Remote Display — Enable/Disable 145

EAS Features 146

EAS Active State 146

EAS Timeout 147

Interface Related Features 148

Interface Type 148

Number of Host Transmission Buffers 169

AIM ID 170

Label ID Control 172

Global Prefix 175

Global Suffix 177

Case Conversion 179

IBM Features 181

IBM Interface Options 181

IBM Number of Host Resets 182

IBM Scale Address 183

IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format .... 185

IBM Label Slicing Control 186

IBM Maximum Label Slice Length 187

OEM USB Scanner Device Type 188

RS-232 Features 189

RS-232 Baud Rate 189

RS-232 Number of Data Bits 193

RS-232 Number of Stop Bits 194

RS-232 Parity 195

RS-232 Hardware Control 197

RS-232 Intercharacter Delay 200

RS-232 Software Flow Control 201

RS-232 Host Echo 202

RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval 203

RS-232 Ignore Host Commands 204

RS-232 TTL 205

RS-232 TTL Invert 206

RS-232 ICL DC1 Character Delay Enable 207

RS-232 Team POS ICL Scale 208

RS-232 Beep on ASCII BEL 209

RS-232 Beep After Weigh 210

RS-232 Beep on Not on File 211

RS-232 ACK NAK Enable 212

RS-232 ACK Character 214

RS-232 NAK Character 215

RS-232 Retry on ACK NAK Timeout 216

RS-232 ACK NAK Timeout Value 217

RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count 218

RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling 219

RS-232 Indicate Transmission Failure 221

Single Cable RS-232 Options 222

Single Cable RS-232 Scanner Only Protocol 223

Single Cable RS-232 Stale Weight Timeout 224

Single Cable RS-232 Scale — Transmit Weight Digits 226

Single Cable Manufacturer Extensions 227

Single Cable Pacesetter Plus Enable 228

Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection 229

Single Cable RS-232 Use BCC 232

Single Cable RS-232 Use ACK/NAK 233

Single Cable RS-232 Use STX 234

Set Single Cable RS-232 STX Character 235

Set Single Cable RS-232 ETX Character 236

Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features 237

Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout 237

Keyboard Interface Quiet Interval 246

Keyboard Interface Caps Lock State 247

Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Simulation 249

Keyboard Interface — Control Characters 250

Keyboard Interface — Intercharacter Delay 252

Symbology Programming 253

Coupon Control 253

UPC-A Enable 255

UPC-A Number System Character Transmission 256

UPC-A Check Character Transmission 257

Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 258

UPC-A Label ID 259

UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID 260

UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID 261

UPC-A 128 Supplemental Label ID 262

UPC-A Minimum Reads 263

UPC-E Enable 265

UPC-E Number System Character Transmission 266

UPC-E Check Character Transmission 267

Expand UPC-E to UPC-A 268

Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 269

UPC-E Label ID 270

UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID 271

UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID 272

UPC-E 128 Supplemental Label ID 273

UPC-E Minimum Reads 274

EAN-13 Enable 276

EAN-13 First Character Transmission 277

EAN-13 Check Character Transmission 278

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion Enable 279

EAN 13 Label ID 280

EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID 281

EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID 282

EAN-13 128 Supplemental Label ID 283

EAN-13 Minimum Reads 284

Bookland Label ID 286

EAN-8 Enable 287

EAN-8 Check Character Transmission 288

Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13 289

EAN-8/JAN-8 Guard Insertion 290

EAN-8/JAN-8 Guard Substitution 291

EAN-8/JAN-8 Both Guards Substitution 292

EAN-8 Stitch Exact Label Halves 293

EAN-8 Stitch Unlike Label Halves 294

EAN 8 Label ID 295

EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID 296

EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID 297

EAN-8 128 Supplemental Label ID 298

EAN-8 Decoding Levels 299

EAN-8 Minimum Reads 302

EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length 304

Other UPC/EAN Options 310

Price Weight Check 311

In-Store Label Minimum Reads 314

Enable EAN Two Label 316

EAN Two Label Combined Transmission 317

UPC/EAN Guard Insertion 318

UPC/EAN Stitch Exact Label Halves 319

UPC/EAN Stitch Unlike Label Halves 320

UPC/EAN Character Reconstruction 321

EAN Two Label Minimum Reads 322

UPC/EAN Correlation 324

UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length 325

Addons 331

Addon Timer 335

2-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads 336

5-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads 338

Code 128 Add-ons Minimum Reads 340

GTIN Enable 342

GTIN Label ID 343

GTIN 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID 344

GTIN 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID 345

GTIN Code 128 Supplemental Label ID 346

DataBar Omnidirectional Enable 347

DataBar Omnidirectional/EAN-128 Emulation 348

DataBar Omnidirectional Label ID 349

DataBar Omnidirectional Minimum Reads 350

DataBar Expanded Enable 352

DataBar Expanded EAN-128 Emulation 353

DataBar Expanded Label ID 354

DataBar Expanded Length Control 355

DataBar Expanded Length 1 356

DataBar Expanded Length 2 357

DataBar Expanded Minimum Reads 358

Code 39 Enable 360

Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission .... 361

Code 39 Check Character Calculation ...... 362

Code 39 Check Character Transmission .... 363

Code 39 Full ASCII 364

Code 39 Label ID 365

Code 39 Require Quiet Zones 366

Code 39 Length Control .... 367

Code 39 Length 1 368

Code 39 Length 2 369

Code 39 Correlation 370

Code 39 Stitching .... 371

Code 39 Minimum Reads ....372

Pharmacode 39 Enable 374

Pharmacode 39 Start Stop Character Transmission 375

Pharmacode 39 Check Character Transmission .... 376

Pharmacode 39 Label ID 377

Code 128 Enable 378

Code 128 Transmit Function Characters .... 379

Convert Code 128 to Code 39 .... 380

Code 128 Label ID 381

Code 128 Length Control 382

Code 128 Length 1 383

Code 128 Length 2 384

Code 128 Correlation ....385

Code 128 Stitching 386

Code 128 Minimum Reads ....387

EAN-128 Enable 389

EAN-128 Label ID 390

Interleaved 2 of 5 (1 2 of 5) Enable ....391

12 of 5 Check Character Calculation ......392

12 of 5 Check Character Transmission 393

12 of 5 Label ID 394

12 of 5 Length Control 395

| 2 of 5 Length 1 ....396

12 of 5 Length 2 ....397

12 of 5 Correlation 398

12 of 5 Stitching 399

12 of 5 Minimum Reads ....400

Standard 2 of 5 (Std 2 of 5) Enable ....402

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ....403

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission 404

Standard 2 of 5 Label ID ....405

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control 406

Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 ....407

Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 408

Standard 2 of 5 Correlation ....409

Standard 2 of 5 Stitching 410

Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads ....411

Codabar Enable 413

Codabar Start Stop Character Transmission 414

Codabar Start Stop Character Set 415

Codabar Start Stop Character Match 417

Codabar Check Character Calculation 418

Codabar Check Character Transmission 419

Codabar Label ID 420

Codabar Require Quiet Zones 421

Codabar Length Control 422

Codabar Length 1 423

Codabar Length 2 424

Codabar Correlation 425

Codabar Stitching 426

Codabar Minimum Reads 427

Code 93 Enable 429

Code 93 Label ID 430

Code 93 Length Control 431

Code 93 Length 1 432

Code 93 Length 2 433

Code 93 Correlation ....434

Code 93 Stitching 435

Code 93 Minimum Reads 436

MSI/Plessey Enable 438

MSI/Plessey Check Character Calculation 439

MSI/Plessey Number of Check Characters 440

MSI/Plessey Check Character Transmission 441

MSI/Plessey Label ID 442

MSI/Plessey Length Control 443

MSI/Plessey Length 1 444

MSI/Plessey Length 2 445

MSI/Plessey Correlation 446

MSI/Plessey Stitching 447

MSI/Plessey Minimum Reads 448

Appendix A. LED/BEEPER INDICATIONS & CONTROLS.... 451

Controls and Indicators 451

LED and Beeper Indications 452

Volume/Tone Push Button 454

Scale Zero Push Button 456

Calibration Switch 457

Appendix B. CABLE INFORMATION.... 459

Introduction 459

General Specifications 459

RS-232 Cable Pinout 460

Scanner 460

Scale 461

IBM Cable Pinout 462

Scanner and Scale 462

OEM USB Cable Pinout 463

Scanner and Scale 463

Auxiliary Port 464

External Handheld Input 464

Power Cable 465

Connector Hardware 465

Remote Display 466

Connector Hardware 466

EAS Comm Port (Sensormatic ^® systems ONLY) 467

EAS Deactivator Control Box Connection 467

Appendix C. KEYPAD.... 469

Appendix D. HOST COMMANDS.... 477

Accepting Commands from an RS-232 Scanner Host 477

Appendix E. KEYBOARD FUNCTION KEY MAPPINGS 479

Keyboard Model Cross Reference 479

Appendix F. FACTORY DEFAULTS.... 489

Appendix G. HANDHELD DATA FORMAT REQUIREMENTS.... 515

Handheld Data Format Requirements General 515

Datalogic Handheld Data Format Requirements 516

AIM Formats 523

Chapter 1 Introduction

This Product Reference Guide contains comprehensive instructions on scanner or scanner/scale installation. Either model may be termed “scanner” for the purpose of simplicity in this manual. Also included are feature configuration using special programming feature bar code labels and advanced user information as described in the following chapter descriptions.

Manual Overview

Chapter 1, Introduction, outlines the manual's contents, details features and specifications, provides regulatory and safety information, and lists the symbologies (bar code types) the scanner will read.

Chapter 2, Site Preparation and Installation, presents physical dimensions for the scanner or scanner/scale and popular accessories, and provides counter preparation and installation procedures. Cable routing, connection and testing are additionally detailed in this chapter.

Chapter 3, Operation and Maintenance, contains use and maintenance instructions; providing details about operator controls, programming and diagnostic modes, scale “zeroing” and calibration. Scanner and scale routine maintenance is also outlined in this chapter.

Chapter 4, Problem Isolation, outlines the three scanner/scale test modes: Selftest, Operational Tests and Diagnostic Tests. Procedures for system problem and troubleshooting flowcharts to aid in problem resolution are also presented in this chapter.

Chapter 5, Calibration, explains scale calibration and verification procedures, including procedures for calibrating the scale in pounds as well as kilograms.

Chapter 6, Programming, highlights the function(s) of each programmable feature and provides a dedicated set of bar codes for configuring scanner and scanner/scale features. This chapter is organized by the categories: General Features, Interface Related Features and Symbology Related Features.

Appendix A, LED/Beeper Indications & Controls, contains tables describing the various functions and indications of the scanner/scale control panel features.

Appendix B, Cable Information, references wire requirements, connector specifications and pinout details for product cabling.

Appendix C, Keypad, is a set of bar codes representing the digits and characters required to enter extended programming data needed during certain programming sessions.

Appendix D, Host Commands, furnishes a partial listing of available host commands that can be used with a compatible host interface.

Appendix E, Keyboard Function Key Mappings, summarizes the keyboard models, their defined protocol, scancode set, and some unique features. Other tables in this chapter provide the function key maps associated with each of the scancode sets.

Appendix F, Factory Defaults, lists factory default programmable settings for common interfaces.

Appendix G, Handheld Data Format Requirements, contains application notes describing the general format of data accepted by the scanner through the auxiliary port as transmitted from a handheld scanner.

How to Use This Manual

Reference the first chapter of this manual for a general description of the product's features and an outline of the manual's contents and organization. View the remaining chapters for procedures regarding scanner or scanner/scale installation, operation, maintenance, calibration and bar code programming.

Manual Conventions

NOTE	'NOTE' blocks contain information that is helpful and recommended. They provide information that is critical to operations and/or procedures described in this manual.
	'LEGAL NOTE' blocks indicate procedures or activities which may be regulated under law by governmental agencies. It is your responsibility to ensure compliance with the regulations that govern installation of weighing devices.
	'CAUTION' blocks inform you that proper handling (adherence to the procedures described) is required to avoid damage to equipment and/or property.
	'WARNING' blocks alert you to potential physical harm or injury. These statements do not include potentially fatal hazards, which would be designated as 'DANGER' blocks. Use of this product does not warrant the need for a DANGER block.

Technical Support

Datalogic Website Support

The Datalogic website (www.datalogic.com) is the complete source for technical support and information for Datalogic products. The site offers product support, product registration, warranty information, product manuals, product tech notes, software updates, demos, and instructions for returning products for repair.

Reseller Technical Support

An excellent source for technical assistance and information is an authorized Datalogic reseller. A reseller is acquainted with specific types of businesses, application software, and computer systems and can provide individualized assistance.

Telephone Technical Support

If you do not have internet or email access, you may contact Data-logic technical support at (541) 349–8281.

Scanner and Scanner/Scale Features

Controls, indicators and other features are shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1. Scanner/Scale Features

Connections

Two connector panels are located on either side of the scanner as shown in Figure 2. The appearance of these panels will vary depending upon the factory options purchased with your model. Additionally, a service “pigtail” extends from the scanner’s base to connect the control panel cable from the Bonnet area.

Figure 2. Connectors

Physical Parameters

This chapter provides specifications for performance, environmental and electrical parameters. Reference Chapter 2, Site Preparation and Installation, for physical measurements of all models and some accessories.

Scanning

The scanner has a scan zone between the two windows where the scanner projects laser light in order to scan items. Two separate projections, one from the horizontal window and one from the vertical window, combine to form a zone where bar code labels are read. Refer to Chapter 3, Scanning Items, for more information.

Deactivating EAS Labels

Deactivation of EAS (Electronic Article Surveillance) anti-theft labels is an additional function that can be performed by the scanner. More information about this feature can be referenced under the following topics:

• Chapter 3, Deactivating Security Labels
• Chapter 6, EAS Features

Weighing

Specifications for scale capacity, settling time, minimum and maximum static weight, zeroing, and warm-up time are given below. For more information regarding the topic: Proper Weighing Technique on page 53, refer to Chapter 3, Operation and Maintenance in this manual.

Rated Weight Capacity

The scale's operational weight capacity is:

• 30.00 pounds, displayed in 0.01 increments OR
• 15.000 kilograms, displayed in 0.005 increments.

Minimum Increment

The minimum weight that can be accurately measured by the scale is 0.01 lb. (0.005 kg).

Maximum Static Weight (Overload)

A maximum static weight of 150 pounds (68 kg) can be sustained by the scale without incurring damage or degrading performance.

Automatic Zero Maintenance

The scale's software constantly monitors and adjusts the Zero point as long as the deviation is within acceptable limits, while compensating for debris accumulation or removal. During power-up, the scale automatically re-zeros after verifying that all subsystems are functional. Additionally, the scale may be manually “zeroed” by pushing the Scale Zero Push Button at the bottom of the control panel.

Warm-Up Time

NOTE

There are two pertinent warm-up times that apply to the scanner or scanner/scale:

The two warm-up periods can be performed concurrently, thereby reducing the total required warm-up time to 60 minutes.

Thermal Equilibrium

When the unit is moved from a cooler temperature (such as a storage area) to a warmer environment (such as a checkstand location), 60 minutes must be allowed to acclimate the unit to ambient conditions prior to calibration or operation.

Power-up

Once installed and powered up, a warm-up time of 15 minutes must be allowed before calibrating or performing weighing operations.

User Configurable Warm-up

The user may configure the unit for a pre-programmed warm-up time that is activated every time the scanner is powered up. During this time, the scale is viewed by the POS terminal as off-line.

NOTE

Contact Technical Support on page 4 to learn more about this advanced programmable feature.

Figure 3. Environmental Specifications

Operation
	Temperature 10° to +40°C 50° to +104°F	Dust Proof Optics Cavity, IP5X
Illumination Artificial Light: 0-450 Foot-candles (4,842 LUX)	Sunlight: 0-8,000 Foot-candles (86,080 LUX)	Humidity Hot / Wet 40°C / 95% RH Hot / Dry 40°C / 15% RH Cold / Dry 10°C / 1 5% RH Warm / Wet 25%C / 50% RH
	Spill Proof (Datalogic MS-0006-13-0004)
Storage
	+70°C +158F -40°C -40F Temperature -40° to +70°C -40° to +158°F

Electrical Specifications

Before installation, always verify that the site's electrical service meets the scanner/scale's requirements. The scanner has been engineered for compatibility with most international electrical systems operating in ranges from 100 to 240VAC at 50–60 Hz. Verify that the power source will supply "clean" electrical power to the equipment; that is, it must be free of excess electrical noise.

Bar Codes Supported

The scanner can read/decode the following bar code types (symbolologies):

Retail Codes

• UPC Versions A & E with full expansion E to A, plus A and E to 13 capability
• UPC Supplementals and Add-ons (Bookland & Coupon code, UPC two character supplemental encoding and UPC five character supplemental encoding and supplemental C128) with support for conditional add-ons
• DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly RSS-14)
• DataBar Expanded (formerly RSS Expanded) maximum characters 74 numeric or 41 alpha
• DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional (formerly RSS-14 Stacked)
  • EAN 8 & 13 with full expansion 8 to 13
  • JAN 8 & 13 with full expansion 8 to 13
  • UCC/EAN 128
  • Italian Pharmacode (Code 39)
  • Support GTIN

Industrial Codes

• C o d e 3 9
- Code 39 full ASCII
• Code 128 (including conversion to Code 39)
• C o d e 9 3
• Interleaved 2 of 5 (1 2 of 5)
- Standard 2 of 5
- Codabar
• MSI/Plessey

Dual Bar Codes for Japan (2 label read)

NOTE

The following qualifications apply to Dual Bar Codes for Japan:

■ Two label combined transmission
- Two label global midamble (see Chapter 6, Programming, for more details)
- Two label flag is set by selecting any 4 digits as the flag

Chapter 2

Site Preparation and Installation

This chapter provides a reference for preparing most checkstands to receive the scanner or scanner/scale. Included are physical parameters and instructions for checkstand preparation, power and ventilation considerations, cable routing information and unit installation.

Site Preparation lists all procedures necessary to prepare the checkstand. The instructions that follow, titled Checkstand Preparation on page 21, detail steps for the scanner only and scanner/scale variations that are available (shown in Figure 4) to facilitate easy installation into almost any checkstand application around the world.

Once the procedures in this chapter are complete, the scanner is ready for scanning operation ^1 ; with the exception that if a scanner/ scale was installed, calibration will be required before placing the unit into operation. You must consult the local weights and measures authority to ensure that all legal requirements are met concerning calibration and certification. Chapter 5, Calibration, contains detailed procedures for calibrating the scale in either pounds or kilograms.

Models

Scanner and scanner/scale models (reference Figure 4) are available in different lengths, allowing them to fit with little or no modification into openings cut for previously installed scanners such as Datalogic™ Magellan™ scanners, or NCR® scanner models 7820/24 and 7870. Other models are designed for applications with smaller footprint requirements.

Figure 4 provides simplified illustrations of short, medium and long models. The appearance of your unit may vary. Scanner/scale models also offer an option for a raised Produce Rail, or a flip-up Produce Bar as shown in Figure 6.

Figure 4. Model Examples

Figure 5. Flanged and Shelf Model Examples

Figure 6. Produce Bar and Produce Rail

Pre-Installation Considerations

It should be noted that the scope of this manual does not encompass all factors related to worker safety and checkstand design. It does, however, offer a list of considerations that may be helpful in ensuring greater safety and productivity. Careful planning using these general guidelines should result in a more efficient, comfortable work environment.

The U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics reports that the incidence of repetitive motion injuries has increased dramatically in recent years. Checkstand design and scanner installation and operation procedures can reduce the risk of repetitive motion injuries, but not eliminate it.

Although there are currently no formal guidelines for checkstand ergonomics, the Food Marketing Institute (FMI) and the National Institute of Occupational Safety (NIOSH) of the Department of Health and Human Services have released the reports listed at the end of these recommendations. These reports contain useful suggestions for ergonomic improvement of checkstand designs and scanner installation, maintenance and usage. Portions of the reports are summarized below. For copies of the complete reports, or to inquire about any modifications to the recommendations, contact FMI and NIOSH at the addresses listed at the end of these recommendations.

Checkstand Design

1. Select a design which allows load-sharing by several muscle groups (for example designs which allow the cashier to use both hands for scanning and bagging).
2. Select checkstands which deliver products to the cashier on an input belt and do not require the unloading of items from a cart. These designs put less stress on the cashiers' shoulders and back.
3. Minimize the distance between the input and take-away conveyors (i.e., the distance the cashier has to reach to move the products).
4. Minimize the width of the input conveyor to reduce the cashier's reach to items on the far side of the belt; use a diverter to direct products closer to the cashier.
5. Select a design which encourages the cashier to slide products across the scanner rather than gripping and lifting. Make sure the horizontal surface of the scanner is flush with all surrounding surfaces.
6. Choose a design which integrates the scanner and scale to eliminate extended reaches and lifts during weighing tasks.
7. Provide an easily accessible bag stand at a height 13 - 17 inches (33 - 43.2 cm) lower than the top surface of the check-stand to reduce stresses to the shoulders, elbows, and risks associated with lifting products into bags.
8. Do not position the bag stand between the cashier and the scanner, due to the increased reach involved.
9. Position the scanner's horizontal scanning surface 34–36" (86.4 – 91.4 cm) above the floor. Maintain a minimum of five inches (12.7 cm) clearance between elbows and work surfaces.
10. Provide adjustable keyboard mounting (height, tilt, and horizontal reach).

11. Position the printer, cash drawer, and other checkstand devices the cashier uses within easy reach (less than 18 inches/45.7 cm).

12. Provide adequate toe space, foot rests or rails, antifatigue mats, and where feasible, an adjustable seat or stand against which the cashiers can lean.

Scanner Installation

1. Mount the horizontal surface of the scanner flush with the countertop to encourage slide scanning rather than lifting.
2. Position the centerline of the scanner read area 8 - 10 inches (20.3 - 25.4 cm) from the edge of the checkstand (cashier side).

Scanner Maintenance

1. Keep scanner windows clean. This will improve productivity and reduce rescans.
2. Replace scanner glass when excessive scratches are evident.

References

Anonymous, 1992, “Ergonomic Improvement of Scanning Checkstand Designs”, Food Marketing Institute 800 Connecticut Ave. N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006

Grant, Katharyn A. et al., 1992, "Ergonomic Evaluation of Checkstand Designs in the Retail Food Industry", National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health 4676 Columbia Parkway Cincinnati, Ohio 45226

Scanner Usage

1. Minimize handling of heavy/bulky products. Leave these items in the cart and use an alternative entry method such as key entry of short PLUs, or handheld scanning.

2. Regularly train cashiers in proper scanning methods and ergonomics principles, such as:

3. Develop a smooth fluid motion during scanning, sharing work equally between hands.

4. Use the entire hand for grasping and lifting items.
5. Since the scanner reads labels on all four sides plus the top and bottom, there is no need to turn a bar code toward either of the scanner windows.
6. Develop efficient scanning motions, not necessarily faster hand movements. Simply slide the item across the scanner's horizontal window with as little orientation motion as necessary.
7. Leave items in an upright position; do not lift and tilt.
8. Learn how the scanner functions and where the scanning area is located.
9. Do not favor either the vertical or horizontal window; slide items across the scanner in their natural orientations on the checkstand as much as possible.

Site Preparation Overview

Consider the following factors before installing the scanner or scanner/scale and its optional Remote Scale Display.

Ventilation Requirements — The scanner operates without the use of a ventilation fan. As long as there is adequate convective air flow and no major heat producing equipment in close proximity, the unit's housing provides adequate heat dissipation. The air temperature in the checkstand around the scanner must not exceed 104°F (40°C).

Service Access Requirements — Routine operations such as ‘zeroing’ and calibration do not require removal of the scanner from the checkstand or disassembly of the product. The installer should plan service access for the AC/DC Power Supply and cables.

Recommended Power Installation — Since the typical grocery environment includes conveyor belts and electric motors, care should be taken to ensure that the scanner has a supply of “clean” power (power without excessive electrical noise).

Counter Preparation — Since the majority of grocery checkout lanes are designed as “left-hand take away,” the counter drawings in this chapter focus on this counter design. Simply reverse the layout for a “right-hand take away” requirement. The unit scans equally well in either of these two configurations.

Liquid Drainage — Should a liquid spill occur, ensure that moisture can flow through the checkstand without pooling.

Leveling — Plan ahead and provide screws/bolts in the checkstand mounts and a leveling guide (board) to allow leveling of the scanner or scanner/scale within the counter. Use a 0.375" thick board to replicate the mounting flange on the long scanner or scanner/scale, and adjust screws or bolts until the board is flush within the counter. Use a 4.0" wide board stood on its end to adjust leveling screws/bolts in rail support applications.

Cable Routing — Placement of the scanner/scale should be planned to allow easy access to other components as well as optimize communication between the scanner, the POS terminal, the optional Remote Scale Display and any EAS peripheral equipment. Do not route interface cables near any electrical motors or other sources of electromagnetic interference.

Remote Scale Display Placement — The customer, and checker in some instances, must be able to easily view and read the Remote Scale Display. Ambient light and mounting height considerations are discussed later in this chapter.

Vertical Clearance — Provision must be made to allow adequate space above the scanner bonnet for removal and replacement of an L-shaped platter. Optimal clearance permits the platter to be grasped at its top vertical edge and lifted for removal without obstruction (such as a fixed keyboard mount or any type of enclo-

sure). Should such an enclosure be unavoidable, an alternate method of platter removal using two coins may be employed, however a minimum vertical clearance of 1.5" (3.8 cm) MUST be provided (reference Figure 7). Another consideration is that the scan zone must be kept free of obstructions such as enclosures, keyboard mounts, etc.

Figure 7. Vertical Clearance

Ventilation and Spacing

The scanner/scale's perimeter housing has been designed to provide adequate space for convective cooling and unrestricted movement of the weighing apparatus. Figure 8 shows the debris chutes and ventilation slots. The checkstand design must allow:

• The ambient air temperature inside the checkstand adjacent to the scanner must not exceed 104^ (40°C).
• A source of air that provides adequate cooling by convective air flow.

NOTE

DO NOT place the scanner in a close-fitting, fully enclosed checkstand. Provide a MINIMUM of 16 square inches (103.2 square centimeters) of air intake from below the installation for sufficient convective cooling.

If motors, conveyor belts, or other heat producing equipment are located near the scanner, forced air ventilation may be required. In most installations, a 30 cfm (.84 cmm) axial fan should provide sufficient air movement. If a ventilation fan is installed, one with a removable filter that may be washed or replaced is recommended.

Figure 8. Debris Chutes & Ventilation Slots

Service Access

The scanner and scanner/scale have been engineered to allow performance of all routine service and maintenance (such as “zeroing” and calibration) without removing the scanner from the checkstand. Additionally all cable connections made at the scanner can be connected and removed while the unit is sitting on the countertop. The installer should provide service access to all remaining cable connectors as well as the AC/DC Power Supply (if installed).

Power Installation

Plug your scanner into an electrical outlet that has been wired to meet all applicable electrical codes, laws, and regulations and has a common ground with the Point-of-Sale terminal

Grounding

The AC/DC Power Supply should have an AC outlet with a clean earth ground. If you are not sure how to verify the amount of electrical noise (interference) on the power line, ask a qualified electrician to measure the input line voltage.

Checkstand Preparation

Reference Figure 9. When performing a first time installation into a new checkstand, verify before cutting that room will be allowed for cabling, the AC/DC Power Supply, and any EAS peripheral equipment (such as controller boxes, etc.). When making the opening, take extra care to accurately cut to the correct dimensions. Mounting may require installation of support(s), countertop routing, or other such devices. Depending upon checkstand design, you may wish to install an item diverter to direct items toward the scan window. See the instructions in this manual titled “Counter Cutout” for more details concerning the location and preparation of the opening.

Figure 9. Installation Overview

Liquid Spills and Moisture

Select a checkstand design which allows fluids to flow through, and directs liquids away from any electronic equipment or storage areas.

Counter Cutout

The most important consideration when planning the counter opening for the scanner is the operator's comfortable reaching distance. The ideal, ergonomically sound installation allows items to be directed within easy reach, and a scanning area requiring no lifting or special orientation of items. If you haven't already read the information at the beginning of this chapter titled, Pre-Installation Considerations on page 13, please do so before continuing these instructions.

The symmetrical design of the scanner permits the operator to easily pass items from one hand to the other while scanning (either from right-to-left or left-to-right). With the unique 360-scan zone, scanning is accomplished in one fluid motion. The operator simply slides the item from the conveyor belt or diverter area through the scanning area and passes the item to the other hand, which in turn bags it or places it on a take-away conveyor belt. Movement should flow naturally over the surface of the scanner.

Note that the following guidelines for preparing an existing checkstand to accept a scanner, or incorporating the unit into a new checkstand design will not be accurate for all installations. Although these guidelines will suffice for most standard installations, the installer may need to make adjustments for varying counter heights and thicknesses, support design, or other checkstand limitations.

Figure 10 shows a typical "left-hand-take-away" checkstand design.

Follow these basic steps to install the unit:

1. Select a position for the scanner that offers a smooth product flow which best accommodates the reaching distance of the average operator.

2. Cut the opening in the countertop. Reference Table 1 to find the cut-out dimensions for your model. Flange and shelf mount dimensions are provided for your convenience.

3. Install the AC/DC Power Supply, the Remote Scale Display cable (if Remote Display is used) and the interface cable(s) observing the following:

Interface cables (and display cable, if applicable) should be routed away from all highly inductive electrical devices, like motors and conveyor belts, and even away from the unit's power cable if possible.

Cables should be easy to remove in the event that replacement is required. A little planning now will save a lot of frustration later.

1. Connect and verify all system operations.

The scanner should be installed so that leading and trailing edges of the L-Platter are flush with the countertop to enhance smooth, slide-through scanning (reference the insert in Figure 10). Keep in mind that the debris chutes on both sides of the platter provide the necessary clearance for proper scale operation if you are installing a scanner/scale (you won't need to provide an additional gap for that).

Table 1. Cut-Out Dimension References

MODEL(s) TYPE		FLANGE / SHELF OPTION	DIMENSIONAL REFERENCE
8301/8401 Short Scanner Shelf			Figure 11
8302/8304 8402/8404	Medium Scanner or Scanner/Scale	Shelf	Figure 13
8302/8304 8402/8404	Medium Scanner or Scanner/Scale	Flange	Figure 15
8303/8305 8403/8405	Long Scanner or Scanner/Scale	Shelf	Figure 17
8303/8305 8403/8405	Long Scanner or Scanner/Scale	Flange	Figure 19

Figure 10. Typical Checkstand Design & Cutout Location

Figure 11. Short Shelf Model 8301/8401 Cutout Dimensions

Figure 12. Short Shelf Model 8301/8401 Scanner Reference Dimensions

Figure 13. Medium Shelf Models 8302/8304/8402/8404 Cutout Dimensions

Figure 14. Medium Shelf Models 8302/8304/8402/8404 Reference Dimensions

Figure 15. Medium Flanged Models 8302/8304/8402/8404 Cutout Dimensions

Figure 16. Medium Flanged Models 8302/8304/8402/8404 Ref. Dimensions

Figure 17. Long Shelf Models 8303/8305/8403/8405 Cutout Dimensions

Figure 18. Long Shelf Models 8303/8305/8403/8405 Reference Dimensions

Figure 19. Long Flanged Models 8303/8305/8403/8405 Cutout Dimensions

Figure 20. Long Flanged Models 8303/8305/8403/8405 Reference Dimensions

Checkstand Mounting

There are a number of things to take into account when installing the unit into a checkstand. Key factors are ergonomic/worker safety, loading capacity and stability. Consider the scanner or scanner/scale's weight when calculating the robustness of construction needed to support it as well as maximum capacity of weighed and scanned items.

NOTE

If you choose to rout a countertop with a thickness of 0.75" (1.9 cm) plywood, you'll need to add a backing strip that supports the area routed out for the support flanges (see Figure 9). This support strip should minimally be made of 0.75" (1.9 cm) thick plywood and be approximately 4.0" (10.2 cm) wide and 14.0" (35.6 cm) long. This strip should be glued as well as screwed to the underside of the countertop.

Checkstand Vibration

Proper function of the scanner/scale is dependent upon an installation which minimizes excess vibration from conveyor belts, fans, and other such equipment. See Chapter, if vibration is suspected of causing operational problems.

Installation Overview

The preceding Site Preparation Overview on page 16 dealt with installed location and counter preparations to accommodate the scanner or scanner/scale. Having completed those steps, physical installation of the scanner or scanner/scale can begin. The following instructions apply to all models.

This chapter describes:

1. Unpacking the unit.
2. Verifying operation before connecting to a POS system.
3. Routing and connecting cables.
4. Validating that your scanner communication parameters match the POS terminal's system requirements.
5. Confirming connection to the (optional) EAS system.
6. Functional testing to verify operation when connected to the POS system.

The following text describes each of these steps.

Unpacking

To unpack the unit:

• Inspect the package for signs of damage that may have occurred during shipping. If damage is found, report it to your carrier immediately.
• Lift out the accessory box containing the AC/DC Power Supply, optional Remote Scale Display and cable (if present), and the Quick Reference Guide.
• Remove the Quick Reference Guide and familiarize yourself with the unit's controls and features. Leave the guide at the checkstand when the installation is complete.
• Remove the protective packing and carefully lift the unit from the carton. Be sure to save the box and all packing material. In the event of failure, the unit must be returned to the factory in its original packaging.
• Carefully lift off the L–Platter as shown in Figure 29 and remove the protective foam pieces securing the weigh mechanism. Set the platter back in place.

NOTE

For added protection during shipment, the L-Platter is covered with a tight-fitting layer of vinyl as shown in Figure 21. This vinyl layer MUST BE REMOVED before placing the unit into service.

Figure 21. Remove Protective Vinyl

• Proceed to Operational Verification below.

Operational Verification

Follow these steps to ensure that your unit has arrived undamaged and is fully functional before installing it in the counter and connecting it to your POS system.

1. EAS units ONLY: It could be necessary that EAS connections be made previous to power-up. Reference the EAS system manufacturer's instructions for more details.

2. Scanner/Scale units ONLY: If the unit is a scanner/scale, connect the Remote Scale Display to the proper connector on the unit's connector panel (refer to Figure 25). Note that if the Remote Scale Display is not connected, a scanner power-up Selftest will sound a long, low beep, and the number "8" will appear on the 7-segment display indicating a remote display error. Power-down, connect a known-good Remote Display to the appropriate port, and restart to correct this problem. Alternatively, you can disable the Remote Display using programming bar codes (see Chapter 6, Programming, for more information).

3. Connect the power cable at the scanner, then at the AC outlet. When power is applied to the unit, the normal indicator sequence is:

NOTE

• The scanner indicator (top-most, green LED) will be lit (dim) steadily.
• The 7-segment display will flash the number '8'. indicating initialization.
• If the Selftest detects a problem, the 7-segment display will display a number code. Refer to Chapter 4, Problem Isolation, for a description of failure codes and problem isolation procedures.

Scale calibration may be necessary to obtain a zero reading on the display on rare occasions.

1. The unit should be permitted to reach thermal equilibrium before proceeding to the next steps. (Reference the topic Warm-Up Time on page 8.) When the unit is moved from a cooler temperature (such as a storage area) to a warmer environment (such as a checkstand location), a period of 60 minutes must be allowed to acclimate the unit to ambient conditions. Once installed and powered up, a “power-up” warm-up period of 15 minutes must be allowed before calibrating or performing weighing operations. These two warm-up periods may run concurrently.
2. Verify that the scanner or scanner/scale passes an operational test by observing the following:

Scanner — Pass UPC/EAN bar code labels in front of the scanner's windows. Since the interface cable is not yet connected to the POS terminal, the scanner may be limited to reading only one or two labels (see the note that follows). The scanner indicates when each label has been successfully read by flashing the green scanner light and emitting a good read tone (beep). Some host interface types may “chirp” instead of beeping.

NOTE

When not connected to the host, the scanner may be limited to reading only one or two labels. (This limitation is dependent upon the interface type.) To scan multiple labels without connecting to the host, place the unit in Scanner Diagnostic Mode by pressing the Volume/Tone Push Button for four seconds.

EAS System — The way in which EAS labels are deactivated is dependent upon which aftermarket EAS system was purchased and installed. See the user's manuals and other documentation accompanying that EAS equipment.

Scale — If the Yellow (bottom) LED/Button is not lit, press that button momentarily. If the scale is operating correctly, the yellow LED will illuminate and remain on steady, and the display will show a reading of 0.00 lb (0.000 kg for metric). If the display is blank or a -0- is displayed, it may be necessary to calibrate the scale before continuing. Refer to Chapter 5, Calibration, for calibration procedures.

Remote Scale Display — Check to verify that 0.00 lb (0.000 kg for metric) is displayed, then place an item on the weighing platter. Verify that the display shows a weight and that the yellow LED goes out. Remove the item and observe that Remote Scale Display shows 0.00 lb (0.000 kg for metric) and that the yellow LED is On.

1. Unplug the AC power cord from the outlet and disconnect the power cord and Remote Scale Display cable from the scanner's connector panel.

After you have verified that the scanner, EAS system and scale (if present) are completely functional, continue with the following procedures to complete the installation.

Diagnostic Modes

Two diagnostic modes are available which allow you to initiate scanner or scale diagnostic tests, as well as verify the scanner's ability to read bar codes.

Scanner Diagnostic Mode

While in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, continuous scanning of labels is allowed, permitting the user to scan an unlimited number of bar codes while troubleshooting problems. Under normal operation, the scanner stores label data, awaiting the signal which transmits it to the host. When the scanner is not connected to a host, it may read and store only up to two labels, then quit reading until power is cycled (clearing the memory). This mode of operation removes this limitation.

To place the scanner in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, press the Volume/Tone (top) Push Button for approximately four seconds. While pressing the button, the scanner will first sound three tones, wait a

few seconds, then sound six rapid tones; after which you should immediately release the button.

While in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, identification numbers for interface ^1 type, firmware and configuration will scroll continually across the scanner's 7-segment FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) display. This is useful information for field diagnostics. See Figure 40 for the location of the display. For example, if the dual cable RS-232 interface (type 05) were enabled, the firmware designation was R96-1234, and the configuration was R96-5593, the following would be shown (slowly, with blanking between each of the items):

IF-05 r96-1234 r96-5593.

To exit Scanner Diagnostic Mode, cycle power to the unit or press and hold the Volume/Tone Push Button for eight seconds to reset the scanner. See Chapter 3, Scanner and Scale Reset for more information about unit resets.

Scale Diagnostic Mode

To enter Scale Diagnostic Mode, press the Scale Zero Push Button for approximately four seconds. Six rapid tones will be sounded, indicating the unit is leaving normal operation and entering Scale Diagnostic Mode. The Remote Display will flash a '1' across the display while the diagnostic routine is being run. When diagnostics are completed successfully, the display will indicate that the unit has passed the diagnostic test by displaying . Next, the display shows a listing of how many times the unit has been calibrated and zeroed in the form of: where x equals the number of times the scale has been calibrated. Next, the unit will display Zero XXX where x is the number of times the scale has been zeroed. Finally, all segments will be displayed in the form of: -18.850/ visual verification of display function.

If the diagnostics routine is not completed successfully, the scanner will sound a series of tones and the Remote Display will show an error code. Turn to Chapter 4, Problem Isolation, for a description of error codes.

Press the Scale Zero Push Button once more to reset the unit and exit Scale Diagnostic Mode. See Chapter 3, Scanner and Scale Reset for more information about unit resets.

Cables & Connections

Considerations when routing the power and interface cables for the scanner and scanner/scale are:

- Ensure that cables are not pinched, kinked or pierced. - Do not route interface cables in close proximity to electrical motors or other sources of electromagnetic interference.

Do not plug the AC power cord into the outlet at this time. It is a good practice to always connect the power cable to the scanner first before plugging it into the AC receptacle. The procedures titled, Set-Up, provided later in this chapter will instruct you to connect the power cord at that time. Figure 22 illustrates the basic cable routing scheme.

Figure 22. Cable Routing

Figure 23 provides physical dimensions for the AC/DC Adapter (part number 8-0582).

Figure 23. Physical Measurements: AC/DC Adapter

Remote Scale Display Placement/Installation

The modular Remote Display is designed so that single display heads can be stacked to form a dual display as shown in Figure 24a in order to address the specific viewing needs of both the customer and the cashier.

Factors to consider when installing this device are:

• Lighting Considerations on page 37
• Viewing Angle on page 38
• Remote Display Cabling on page 39

Lighting Considerations

The display(s) will be easily readable unless placed in direct sunlight or other very strong light sources. Light interference will not be a factor in most installations. For best viewing, the display head(s) can each be rotated up to 180^ around the post and/or tilted 15^ backward or forward.

Viewing Angle

The optimum display angle is directly facing the viewer. Tilt and rotatioin adjustments can be made as shown in Figure 24b. To ensure that displays are easily readable for customers/cashiers of average height, display heads should be between 48" to 60" (122 to 152 cm) from the floor.

Check with local Weights and Measures authorities regarding proper positioning of scale displays used in retail trade.

Figure 24. Modular/Adjustable Remote Scale Display

Remote Display Cabling

Your installation should also take into account the routing of Remote Display cabling. Ensure that distance and obstacles spanned by the routed cable will not kink, pinch or stretch it. Also keep in mind you may need to drill a hole through which to route it.

NOTE

The Remote Scale Display connector end may be secured with a rubber band during shipping to prevent damage to the "locking tabs" (see Figure 26). After routing the cable, remove this rubber band before connecting. Failure to remove the band will keep the connector from latching properly.

Placing and Installing the Remote Scale Display

Reference Figure 26 while performing these procedures.

1. Determine where you want to install the Remote Scale Display based on your counter design, the viewing angle, lighting considerations and cable routing discussed previously. Reference Figure 24 for the display's physical dimensions. Optimally, the display(s) should be approximately eye level to the viewer(s).
2. Use the template provided in Figure 27 to mark locations of the mounting screw and cable routing holes. The mounting screw holes are on 3–1/2" (85.1 mm) centers. The cable can either be routed through a ^3/4 " (19 mm) diameter hole directly under the mounting base or through the cutout in the back of the base (see Figure 26).
3. Drill the mounting screw holes using a drill bit of the appropriate diameter for your mounting screws or bolts.
4. Drill the cable routing hole using a ^3/4" (19 mm) drill bit (optional).

Figure 25. Physical Measurements: Remote Display

1. Feed the entire length of the Remote Scale Display interface cable through the cable routing hole so that the assembled Remote Scale Display can be positioned over the mounting screw holes.
2. If present, remove the rubber band from the connector end.
3. Install mounting screws or bolts to complete the installation of the Remote Scale Display. Take care not to pinch or pierce the interface cable while securing the Remote Scale Display to the checkstand.

Figure 26. Remote Scale Display Mounting

Figure 27. Remote Scale Display Mounting Template

Changing Weighing Modes

Your scanner/scale has been programmed for weighing in either pounds or kilograms depending upon the initial operating environment that was specified when you ordered your scanner/scale. If you need to change from pounds to kilograms or vice-versa, call technical support.

You can verify that the scale is set correctly for your country's requirements by observing that the Remote Scale Display shows the appropriate measurement symbol (lb or kg) when the power-up Selftest is completed.

NOTE

Any time the scale weighing mode is changed, the scale must be re-calibrated before commercial use.

Set-Up & Installation

These setup and installation procedures assume that you have already prepared your checkstand to receive the scanner or scanner/scale. If you have not already made the counter cutout and routed power and interface cables, do so now as described in the previous instructions. If your checkstand has been prepared, proceed as follows:

Set-up

1. Place the scanner on the checkstand next to the counter cut-out.
2. Make all connections to peripheral devices, such as the Remote Scale Display (see Figure 26) and, if your installation includes an EAS system, refer to that manufacturer's instructions for connection and start-up procedures.
3. Route the cables up through the cutout and connect the scanner and scale interface cable(s), EAS cable and Remote Scale Display cable (optional) to the scanner. Some POS terminals require two interface cables; one for the scanner interface and one for the scale interface. Refer to Figure 28 for cable connection locations.

If you have a scanner with no scale, there will be only one interface cable to the POS terminal.

1. Connect the power cord to the scanner and route the other end down through the checkstand to the AC power outlet. DO NOT plug the power cord in at this time.

Figure 28. Connecting Cables to the Scanner/Scale

Installation

1. Make sure that all cables are firmly attached (except that the AC/DC power supply should not be connected to the AC outlet yet). Reference Figure 9 and Figure 28.

2. Remove the platter to gain access to the interior lift handle. Grasp the platter in the positions shown in Figure 29 and gently lift it from the scanner. If the top edge of the platter is blocked, you may find it easier to grasp the platter vertical bezel as shown in Figure 29b.

Figure 29 illustrates an L-shaped weigh platter, which features a vertical bezel. Your platter may not contain a vertical bezel.

Figure 29. Removing the Platter

Line drawing of hands operating a device with an upward arrow indicator (no text or symbols present)

1. Rotate the Interior Lift Handle up as shown in Figure 32 and hook the fingers of both hands in the lift handles indicated.

DO NOT attempt to lift the unit using the plastic edges, scale frame, or any features other than the lift handles.

Figure 30. Using the Lift Handles

1. Lower the unit into the counter opening, ensuring that none of the cables are pinched, pierced or crimped.

2. View the bubble level (if present ^1 ) located on the scanner's spider assembly to ensure the scanner is level. As shown in Figure 31, the air bubble should appear fully within the circle indicated. The air bubble can touch the circle, but must not overlap it. Apply shims beneath the scanner bottom or adjust the shelf to allow level installation.

Figure 31. Using the Bubble Level

1. Re-install the Platter and verify that it is flush or just below flush with the countertop. This is necessary to provide smooth scanning from either direction. Make adjustments as needed to align the platter with the counter by moving support rails up or down, or consider installing screws in positions that will allow their use in adjusting the unit's position. Ensure that leveling is maintained if adjustments are made.

Failure to install a scanner/scale in a stable and level position will inhibit weighing, calibration and zeroing operations. The platter MUST make unobstructed contact with all of its supports for proper weighing operation.

1. Once installation is complete, proceed with the Operational Verification on page 32 procedures that follow.

Figure 32. Adaptive Scale Platter Option

Some Platters have been shipped with installed spacers on their undersides at all four corners. These specially-configured Platters are provided for customers wishing to add an adaptive scale to their unit at a later date. Until such time as the adaptive scale is installed, the four spacers should be left in place to ensure that the Platter rests evenly at its correct height when positioned on the scanner.

To remove the spacers, loosen and remove the single screw for each as shown in Figure 33.

Figure 33. Removing the Adaptive Scale Spacers

System Power-Up Recap

The System Power-Up procedure may vary depending upon the requirements of your POS system. It is generally a good practice to power-down (switch off) all equipment prior to connecting cables. Check with your System Supervisor and/or refer to your POS terminal manual for proper power-down and power-up procedures and interface requirements when connecting any peripheral device. If you have not identified any specific requirements for your POS system, follow these steps.

1. Power-down the POS terminal.
2. Ensure that power is disconnected from the scanner.
3. Connect the scanner and scale interface cables to your POS terminal. This connection may use one or two cables depending upon your POS terminal interface.
4. [EAS units ONLY] Connect the EAS interface cable.

NOTE

SENSORMATIC EAS SYSTEMS:

Always Apply power to the EAS Controller box before powering on the scanner.

1. Connect the Remote Display cable if your model is a scanner/ scale and make any connections to optional equipment, such as a handheld scanner.

2. Power-up the scanner or scanner/scale by connecting the power cord to an AC power outlet. Wait for the unit to complete the Self test routine (10 seconds maximum). Successful scanner power-up is signified by any or all of the following:

3. Facet wheel shows movement

4. Lasers turn on
5. Status LED(s) turn on
6. Speaker sounds tone(s)
7. Remote display [if present] shows message

8. A single red dot is visible on the 7-segment display

9. Power-up the POS terminal. Verify that scanning, deactivation and weighing functions are operational and that data is properly communicated between the scanner and your POS system. (Scan, deactivate and weigh a few items.) If problems are encountered, refer to Chapter 4, Problem Isolation.

10. You have now completed installation and system integration of the scanner or scanner/scale. At this point, the scale must be calibrated and certified in accordance with the requirements of your state and/or local requirements. Refer to Chapter 5, Calibration, for calibration procedures.

NOTES

Chapter 3

Operation and Maintenance

The information contained in this chapter describes how to operate and maintain the scanner, and optional scale and EAS systems. Topics include “how to’s” on scanning, EAS label deactivation, weighing, re-zeroing the scale, removing the top cover and cleaning the upper and lower windows.

Scanning Items

NOTE

To scan items using the scanner, slide or push them through the scan zone as shown in Figure 34. The scanner will work equally well with either a left-to-right or right-to-left motion through the scan zone. There is rarely a need to reorient an item's bar code since the scanner has a 360 degree view around an item.

"Limited Scanning Mode" is entered by default by interfaces such as USB and IBM until a Point Of Sale (POS) terminal enables scanning. This mode allows the scanner to read labels without a host interface enabled. The scanner will only process programming labels and emit a bad label read indication ("chirp") for all other labels.

Figure 34. Scan Zone

Proper Scanning Technique

The scanner was designed to provide the ultimate in ergonomic enhancements for Point-Of-Sale (POS) scanning. To take advantage of these advancements:

Practice the techniques below to improve scanning efficiency:

• Move the product across the horizontal window (See Figure 34).
• Since the scanner can reads labels 360 degrees around the product, don't favor either the horizontal or vertical scan windows. Keep items in their natural orientation.
• Remember to slide or push items rather than picking them up. By avoiding any gripping, twisting and rotation of your hands and wrists, you can prevent repetitive motion injuries. This technique also relieves you from lifting possibly thousands of pounds per day.
• Develop a smooth fluid motion during scanning, sharing work equally between hands.
• Use the entire hand for grasping and lifting items.
• Develop efficient scanning motions, not necessarily faster hand movements.
• Learn typical locations for bar codes on packages; avoid "flipping" or rotating the items during scanning.

- Learn how the scanner functions and where the scanning area is located.

Deactivating Security Labels

EAS (Electronic Article Surveillance) labels can be detected and deactivated by a system equipped with this option. This is accomplished by means of a deactivation antenna mounted under the scanner platter. EAS labels should be brought near the antenna to be deactivated. Reference the documentation for the EAS device for more details about its installation and function.

Proper Weighing Technique

1. The L-shaped All-Weighs™ platter allows you to place items anywhere on its surface, including leaning against its vertical section, to be weighed accurately. The “Produce Rail” or (when raised) the “Produce Bar” also provide a convenient way to ensure items do not rest on the counter or other non-weighing surfaces. (Reference Figure 35.)

NOTE

It is important that items rest entirely on the platter for their full weight to be accurately recorded.

Figure 35. All-Weighs™ Platter & Item Placement

1. Once weighed items are in place, enter PLU (price Look-Up) data as described in your POS system instructions. Item weight is displayed on the Remote Display and/or the host display.
2. Remove the item from the weigh platter.

Operational Controls

The function of scanner and scale controls and indicators is listed in Appendix A, LED/Beeper Indications & Controls. Turn to that appendix for full details.

Operational Modes

The scanner or scanner/scale features a number of modes that are important to both the user and the system support personnel. These modes can be combined into three groups: pre-operational, operational, and additional functions. The following text describes these modes, what they mean, and how and when they are seen.

Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation

Pre-Operation describes those steps that must be successfully completed before the scanner sounds the initial good read tone and illuminates the lamps indicating the scanner and/or scale are ready for operation. These steps include Power-Up Selftest, Error Reporting, and Operational Configuration.

Power-Up/Selftest

Power-Up Selftest begins when power is applied. The scanner's software immediately begins the testing sequence to verify that all systems are functioning properly. This routine, which only takes a few seconds, checks all the functions of the scanner, EAS deactivation system, scale, remote scale display and interface prior to indicating that it is ready for operation.

NOTE

A tone indicating Selftest is complete is a configurable feature. See the topic Power-up Beep Control on page 127 in the Programming chapter of this manual.

Error Reporting

If a fatal error is detected during Selftest or operation, the unit will not advance to Normal Operation Mode. Selftest diagnostics will cause the unit to sound a long, low tone and/or display an error message on the 7-segment display indicating where the failure occurred. These messages are coded to assist the repair technician in identifying the failed component. If an error is indicated, make note of it and contact your supervisor or technical support representative. A table containing descriptions of these error codes is included in Chapter 4, Problem Isolation.

If a non-fatal ^1 error is detected (such as the loss of one of the two lasers), the unit will sound a long, low tone and display a number on the 7-segment display. The unit will advance to Normal Operating Mode, but performance may be affected until a correction or repair is made.

Operational Configuration

Once Selftest diagnostics have been successfully run, a tone is emitted (if configured to do so, and the unit enters an operational configuration state. The scanner or scanner/scale will automatically load your specific interface settings which are required to communicate with the host system. There are two conditions that must be met before the unit can enter Operating Mode:

• No bar code label can be in the scan volume while the unit is in this state. Progress is halted until the label has been removed, thereby ensuring that no extraneous bar code data is send to the host.
• If your scanner has a scale, the scale cannot be in motion (usually caused by excessive vibration in the checkstand) for this test to succeed. A “Scale in Motion” status will be indicated by displaying a period and the applicable weight unit (lb or kg) that is selected. kg
• The scale must be able to "capture" zero weight. The -0 - display will be seen if there is a weight on the platter at power-up. Removing the weight or pressing the Scale Zero Push Button should allow the scale to find zero.

• When the scanner or scanner/scale completes its Selftest successfully, it emits a tone (when configured to do so) and enters Operating Mode.

• Scanner behavior under non-fatal error conditions is configurable.

See Chapter 6, Programming for more details.

Operating Mode

Operating Mode includes Normal Operation (scanning, EAS deactivation and weighing) and Sleep Mode. These two modes are most commonly observed by the user/operator.

Normal Operation

This condition is indicated by the scanner green LED being on dim and steady. For scanner/scale models, the scale yellow LED indicates that the scale senses a weight of zero on the platter. If you have a scanner without scale model, the yellow lamp will not be lit when the scanner is ready for scanning.

Yellow and Green LED indications are configurable. Your scanner may not be programmed to operate in the standard manner described above.

Once the scanner enters Normal Operation, it begins a countdown sequence. If there is no activity during a preset period of time (also called time-out ^1 ), the unit will shut off the laser and/or motor in order to prolong the life of the electrical and mechanical components. Once the scanner has timed out, it enters Sleep Mode.

Sleep Mode

After the scanner has been left idle for a preset period of time, the laser and/or motor automatically turns off (goes to sleep). This state is called Sleep Mode, and is indicated by a “slow” blink of the green light (blinking at a 2-second rate). To wake up the unit, press anywhere on the weigh platter (scanner/scale models only), press the Volume Selection switch or wave your hand over the horizontal window. The unit will recognize any of these signals as a wake-up call and instantly return to Normal Operation.

Additional Functions

Additional scanner and scale functions include programming, running scanner or scale diagnostics, initiating a reset, zeroing the scale, and calibrating the scale.

Programming

When your scanner or scanner/scale is shipped from the factory it is configured to work with the POS system interface at your store and read the bar code symbologies you designated. If you need to change this configuration information for any reason, Chapter 6, Programming, contains special bar code labels for changing the unit's settings.

Diagnostic Mode

Refer to Chapter 2, Diagnostic Modes, for details about running scanner and scale diagnostics. Turn to Chapter 4, Problem Isolation, for a description of error codes resulting from diagnostics.

Scanner and Scale Reset

The reset procedures and indicators are identical for scanner and scanner/scale models. As with any electronic equipment, it is sometimes necessary to reset the electronics. The reset procedure allows you to initiate a reset command to the scanner. This may be necessary if the POS terminal has been switched off or the store system has been reset while the unit is on. Reset can also be used to initiate and run the unit's internal Selftest routine.

Pressing and holding the Volume/Tone Push Button for approximately eight seconds initiates a reset, which is sounded by a rapid number of beeps. If the motor had been spinning, the lamps will blink while the motor spins down. At that point, the motor will spin back up and the scanner will continue to run the Selftest diagnostics. For more information, see the topic, Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation on page 54, earlier in this chapter.

Scale Adjustments

The scale allows two user adjustments: zeroing and calibration. The first, and most frequently performed, is ‘zeroing’ the scale. This operation resets the scale’s “at rest” reading to zero which must be within the range of -0.2 pounds (-0.09kg) to +0.6 pounds (0.27kg) since the last calibration. While the ‘at rest’ reading remains within the zero range, the scale will automatically adjust itself to true zero. The scale also automatically zeros itself on power-up if the weight present on the scale is within these defined limits.

Zeroing the Scale

The zeroing operation may be performed by checkers and other store personnel. Pressing and releasing the Scale Zero Push Button should return the scale to Normal Operation. If the zero point moves out of the zero range due to debris accumulation or other causes, pressing the Scale Zero Push Button will not reset the zero point. In this case the weigh platter must be cleaned, debris chutes cleared of debris or the scale must be recalibrated.

With the scanner/scale powered-up and at operating temperature:

1. Remove everything from the weighing surface of the scanner/scale.
2. Press the Scale Zero Push Button. (See Figure 1).
3. The Zero ^1 light will turn on and the display will show 0.00 lb (0.000 kg). If it does not, see Chapter 4, Problem Isolation.
4. You have completed the scale zeroing function.

Calibrating the Scale

The second adjustment, calibration, defines and sets a standard reference weight range against which all product weights are compared. If your scale is set for weighing in pounds, this range is 0 – 30 pounds, and, if your scale is set for weighing in kilograms, the range is 0 – 15 kilograms. The scale must be calibrated upon initial installation, whenever the scale cannot be zeroed, when the scale diagnostics indicate a calibration error, when the weighing measure (pounds or kilograms) is changed, or when the scale module has been replaced.

Normally, once the scale has been calibrated, the calibration must be verified and/or approved by a local regulatory body. In many areas of the United States, the scale calibration switch must be sealed before being placed into service. Consult the agency responsible for regulating weighing devices in your area to ensure that you are meeting all legal and regulatory requirements. Chapter 5, Calibration, describes the calibration sequence and verification process.

Calibration can only be performed if the tamper seal that secures access to the Calibration Switch is broken and the switch cover is removed. Breaking the seal may legally render the scale inoperable until it has been recertified and a new seal attached. Consult your local regulations before removing the calibration seal if you are unsure of the legal requirements. Although the scale will physically continue to weigh products, a broken seal may require recertification by a proper authority as designated by your local laws.

Operational Maintenance

The scanner or scanner/scale will provide dependable service for many years. The following maintenance procedures will keep your scanner or scanner/scale operating at peak performance.

Cleaning the Platter and Scan Windows. Clean the exterior surfaces of the horizontal and vertical scan windows at least twice daily with a nonabrasive, mild, water-based glass cleaner and paper towels or lint-free cleaning tissues. The textured plastic surfaces and stainless steel can also be cleaned using the same cleaning agents.

Cleaning the Air Gap/Debris Chutes & Drip Rail. Daily, clear the debris chutes between the platter and the outer housing. Most items can be cleared from the debris chutes by carefully running a thin stiff object like a credit card along all sides of the weighing surface. If necessary, remove the top cover to clear the debris chutes and drip rail.

Vertical Scan Window Replacement

The Vertical Scan Window is a replaceable part. Follow the instructions below to remove and replace a standard or L-Platter Vertical Scan Window.

Standard Vertical Scan Window Removal

1. Lift up on the vertical bezel as shown in Figure 36a and tilt its top up and away from the scanner as shown.

Figure 36. Removing/Reinstalling the Vertical Bezel

1. Press from the opposite side to release the edge of the Vertical Scan Window from the two retention tabs shown in Figure 36c.

2. Slide the window from the bezel as shown in Figure 36d. Carefully dispose of any damaged glass.

3. Fully seat the new Vertical Scan Window into the window channel, engaging it within the retention tabs. Reference Figure 36d and Figure 36c.

4. Clean both sides of the new Vertical Scan Window using a paper towel or lint free cleaning tissues dampened with a mild, water-based glass cleaner. DO NOT use abrasive cleaners or pads.

5. Tilt in the bezel to seat the two ears at the bottom corners of the bezel into their holes in the scanner and push in on the top of the bezel to securely snap it in place (see Figure 36b). Vertical Scan Window replacement is now complete.

L-Platter Vertical Scan Window Removal

1. Grasp the platter as shown in Figure 37 and gently lift it from the scanner.

Figure 37. L-Platter Removal/Reinstallation

Line drawing of hands operating a device with an arrow indicating upward motion (no text or symbols present)

1. If the top edge of the platter is blocked, you may find it easier to use a coin to lift up an edge of the platter as shown in Figure 37b, then grasp the platter vertical bezel or other exposed edge.

NOTE

Use caution to avoid damage to the now exposed horizontal and Vertical Scan Windows. If cleaning of these windows is necessary, use a nonabrasive, mild, water-based glass cleaner and paper towels or lint-free cleaning tissues and take care to avoid scratching these windows (damage to the windows can degrade scanning performance).

1. The Vertical Scan Window is held in place by two tabs each on its top and bottom edges. To remove it, carefully push out on the top as shown in Figure 38 and lift it out. Carefully dispose of any damaged glass.

Figure 38. Vertical Scan Window Removal/Replacement

1. Fully seat the new Vertical Scan Window into the window channel within its bottom retention tabs. Tilt the window in to engage the two tabs at the top of the retainer and carefully snap the window to secure it in place.

2. Clean both sides of the new Vertical Scan Window using a paper towel or lint free cleaning tissues dampened with a mild, water-based glass cleaner. DO NOT use abrasive cleaners or pads.

3. Re-install the platter. Vertical Scan Window replacement is now complete.

Horizontal Scan Window Replacement (WRG)

Wear Resistant Glass (WRG) horizontal scan windows are replaceable and can be removed and replaced following the instructions below.

NOTE

Sapphire glass does not require replacement, so it is permanently fastened in place. Do not attempt to remove Sapphire glass from the platter.

1. Remove the Platter from the scanner as shown in Figure 37.
2. Turn the platter upside down on a clean, dry surface and remove the two screws shown in Figure 39a. Retain the screws for later re-installation.
3. Tilt the Window Retainer up and away from the platter as shown.
4. Lift out the Window Gasket and WRG Window from the Platter as shown in Figure 39b and carefully dispose of any damaged glass.
5. Position the new WRG Window and its gasket as shown in Figure 39b.
6. Guide the Window Retainer to seat its edge under the tabs and match the screw holes as shown in Figure 39a.
7. Secure the retainer in position using the original two screws.
8. Clean both sides of the new WRG window using a paper towel or lint free cleaning tissues dampened with a mild, water-based glass cleaner. DO NOT use abrasive cleaners or pads.
9. Re-install the platter. WRG Window replacement is now complete.

Figure 39. Removing/Replacing the WRG Window

NOTES

Chapter 4

Problem Isolation

In the event of a suspected functional problem, use the trouble-shooting references provided in this chapter. This useful information will help you to identify and resolve the cause of the problem.

The scanner/scale has a number of features that indicate when a scanner or scale problem occurs. The unit may:

• emit a series of tones
• light the 7-segment (FRU status) display
• flash one or more LEDs
• display error codes on the Remote Display (if installed)

Three error reporting modes are used: Power-Up Selftest, Operational tests and Diagnostic tests. These test sequences are explained on the following pages.

Power-Up Selftest

The Power-up Selftest is a pre-operational series of tests that must be successfully completed before the scanner indicates readiness for operation. This pre-operational period is the time between power-up and normal operation during which the motor comes up-to-speed and software, firmware and hardware are being tested. These tests ensure that all subsystems are fully functional before turning on the Visible Laser Diode (VLD). Refer to Chapter 3, Operational Modes for a more detailed description of this and other scanner and scale modes.

Operational Tests

These are the tests that run continually during Normal Operation and Sleep Mode. Firmware checks all subsystems, accessory connections and the POS interface to verify everything is operating normally. If a problem is detected at any time, a long, low tone is

sounded, an error code is shown on the 7-segment display, and operation may be halted. If you press the Volume/Tone Push Button at that time, a series of tones will be sounded that matches the error code displayed.

Diagnostic Tests

See Chapter 2, Diagnostic Modes, for details about running diagnostic tests for the scanner and/or scale. If a problem is discovered during diagnostics, the scanner will provide feedback about the source of the problem. The remainder of this chapter describes these failure indications and includes troubleshooting flowcharts to help isolate the problem.

Diagnostic Procedures

Your Point-Of-Sale (POS) system may contain many components that operate as a system. Since almost all scanner or scale problems are caused by either the scanner, scale, POS terminal or communication links between them, these troubleshooting flowcharts focus on these components. Additionally, the optional Remote Scale Display, AC/DC Power Supply and their cables are potential problems addressed in this chapter.

The flowcharts provided in this chapter walk you through a diagnostic process that will isolate the failed component and instruct as to the corrective action required. Since internal scanner and scale components cannot be replaced by an operator or installer, most functional errors will require the assistance of a trained technical support person. However, if the problem is caused by faulty cable, power supply or remote display, you can fix the problem by replacing the defective component and complete the installation.

Error Codes

If an error is detected, the scanner will sound a long low tone (for one second) and alternately flash its LEDs, indicating a failure. Following the long low tone, an error code will appear on the 7-segment display (refer to Figure 40). Pressing the Volume/Tone Push button will cause the scanner to sound a series of beeps corresponding to that error code. Table 2 on the following page describes what these codes mean and what action should be taken for each.

NOTE

When troubleshooting, always remember to check all cable connections first before proceeding with other problem isolation steps.

Table 2. Error Codes

Error Code	Probable Cause Corrective Action
0 Blinking	Configuration	No POS interface has been selected (Null interface). See Chapter 6, Interface Type to select the required interface using programming bar codes.
1	Configuration Error	See Chapter 6, Programming, for details about configuring the scanner using programming bar codes.
2	Interface Board Unplug	unit and call technical support personnel.
3	Motor Unplug unit and	call technical support personnel.
4	Horizontal Laser^a	Call technical support personnel.
5	Vertical Laser^a	Call technical support personnel.
6	Digital Board Unplug unit and call technical support personnel.
7	Scale	See the topic Scale Error Reporting on page 72 in this chapter for problem identification and corrective actions.
8	Remote Display	Connect the Remote Display. If necessary, replace display or cable. Alternatively, you can disable the Remote Display using the programming procedures described in Chapter 6.
A	Control Button Stuck	Check to see if either of the buttons is stuck; free it if possible. If neither button is stuck, call technical support personnel.
B	Hardware ID Call technical support personnel.
C	Scale Calibration Calibrate scale or call technical support personnel.
E	CPLD ID Call technical support personnel.
Decimal Point	3.3 V Present If not lit, call technical support personnel

a. If only one laser is non-functional, the scanner may continue to work (this is a configurable feature); however, the 7-segment display will show the error code indicating the failed laser. If both lasers have failed, the 7-segment display will display either a 4 or a 5, and the scanner will cease to function until serviced. No alternate blinking of lamps will occur if only one laser has failed.

Figure 40. 7-Segment LED Display

Scale Error Reporting

Scale diagnostics uses the Remote Scale Display and the Zero Status lamp to communicate specific scale failures. The following chart shows the Remote Display messages, the Scale Status lamp indication, the problem that the scale is experiencing and what action should be taken. When troubleshooting, always remember to check all cable connections first before proceeding with other problem isolation steps.

Remote Display	Scale Status Lamp	Problem Description	Action Required
E_1	Flash, pause, 1 blink, long pause, repeat sequence.	Too much motion at power-up.	Check for stable installation. Scale may require calibration.
E__2	Flash, pause, 2 blinks, long pause, repeat sequence.	Calibration lost.	Call technical support personnel. Re-calibrate; restart; recertify (if required).
E__3	Flash, pause, 3 blinks, long pause, repeat sequence.	Scale communication lost. Internal scanner/ scale problem.	Call technical support personnel; report error.
E__4	Flash, pause, 4 blinks, long pause, repeat sequence.	Scale module failure.	Call technical support personnel; report error.
E__5	Flash, pause, 5 blinks, long pause, repeat sequence.	Internal software fault.	Call technical support personnel; report error.
Other Scale Reporting
-0-	Off	Cannot zero at power-up or weight remains on scale for more than 2 minutes or weight has not returned to zero between POS weight requestsa.	- Check debris chutes.- Verify that the weigh platter moves freely.- Remove item(s) from scale- Press Scale Zero Push Button- for more information.- If the scale still fails to zero, recalibrate the scale.

a. This is a configurable feature.

Flowcharts

The problem isolation flowcharts on the following pages allow you to identify and troubleshoot problems with your system.

Figure 41. Problem Isolation: Start

graph TD
    A["START"] --> B{Does the scanner power-up?}
    B -->|NO| C{Have you checked the power connections?}
    B -->|YES| D{Is the Green LED Lit?}
    C -->|YES| E["Check these potential problems: AC power cord - AC/DC adaptor - AC outlet"]
    C -->|NO| F{Is the Green LED Lit?}
    D -->|YES| G{Does the scanner pass Selftest?}
    D -->|NO| H["Ensure the Green LED is enabled via programming bar codes."]
    E --> I["Call Tech Support"]
    F --> I
    G --> I
    H --> I
    I --> J{Will the scanner read bar codes reliably?}
    J -->|NO| K["Go to Poor/No Reading flowchart"]
    J -->|YES| L{Does the EAS¹ Antenna deactivate tags?}
    L -->|NO| M["Go to EAS System flowchart"]
    L -->|YES| N{Does the scale¹ weigh correctly?}
    N -->|NO| O["Go to Scale flowchart"]
    N -->|YES| P["Call Tech Support"]
    O --> P
    P --> Q["Other Problems? Call Tech Support"]

Figure 42. Problem Isolation: Selftest

graph TD
    A["SELFTEST START"] --> B{Does the 7-segment display show 0?}
    B -->|NO| C{Does the 7-segment display show 1. ?}
    C -->|YES| D["Scan the Factory Defaults bar code in Section 6 to enable the default configuration file. Restart the unit."]
    C -->|NO| E{Does the 7-segment display show 2. or 3. ?}
    E -->|YES| F["Call Tech Support"]
    E -->|NO| G{Does the 7-segment display show 4. or 5. ?}
    G -->|YES| H["Error code 4. indicates a failed horizontal VLDM (laser) assembly, while 5. indicates a failed vertical VLDM. If configured to do so¹, the scanner will remain operational with only one of these lasers until the unit can be serviced. If both lasers have failed, the unit will no longer function."]
    G -->|NO| I{Does the 7-segment display show 7. ?}
    I -->|YES| J["Call Tech Support"]
    I -->|NO| K{Does the 7-segment display show 8. ?}
    K -->|YES| L["Go to Remote Display flowchart"]
    K -->|NO| M{Does the Remote Display show -0- or an error (E_ #)?}
    M -->|YES| N["Go to Scale flowchart"]
    M -->|NO| O["Unit passes Selftest"]
    O --> P["Refer to the feature Laser Failure Mode in Section 6."]
    P --> Q["No interface selected (Null Interface). Select an interface."]

Figure 43. Problem Isolation: Poor/No Reading

graph TD
    A["Have you verified that all scan windows are clean and scratch-free?"] --> B["POOR/NO READING START"]
    B --> C["Enter Scanner Diagnostic Mode by holding the Volume/Tone Push Button for 4 seconds (until first 3, and then 6 rapid tones are sounded) then release. Scan a known-good bar code."]
    C --> D{Does the scanner read the bar code satisfactorily?}
    D -->|NO| E["Call Tech Support"]
    D -->|YES| F["Reset the scanner by holding down the Volume/Tone Push Button for 8 seconds."]
    F --> G{Does the scanner pass the data to the POS?}
    G -->|NO| H["Go to No Transmit to POS flowchart"]
    G -->|YES| I{Does the scanner read satisfactorily?}
    I -->|NO| J["Verify programmable parameters using the information and programming bar codes provided in Section 6. Check bar code symbology options and other configurable features."]
    I -->|YES| K["DONE"]
    I -->|YES| L{Does the scanner read satisfactorily?}
    L -->|NO| M["Troubleshoot the host or call Tech Support."]
    L -->|YES| N["DONE"]
    N --> L
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style M fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style N fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Figure 44. Problem Isolation: No Transmit to POS

graph TD
    A["NO TRANSMIT TO POS START"] --> B["Check the interface (I/F) cable connections. If possible, retest the system using a known-good I/F cable."]
    B --> C{Does the scanner pass the data to the POS ?}
    C -->|YES| D["DONE"]
    C -->|NO| E["Does the scanner read satisfactorily ?"]
    E -->|YES| F["DONE"]
    E -->|NO| G["Troubleshoot the host or call Tech Support."]

Figure 45. Problem Isolation: Scale

graph TD
    A["SCALE START"] --> B["View the Remote Display and/or the Yellow scale status LED for the scale error code. Reference the topic, Scale Error Reporting in Section 4 for more information."]
    B --> C{0- shown on RemoteDisplay/ Yellow LED off ?}
    C -->|YES| D{- Check for debris under platter.}
    C -->|NO| E{E_1 shown on Remote Display/ Yellow LED Flash once ?}
    E -->|YES| F["Problem is too much motion at power-up. Correct excess vibration in counter if possible."]
    E -->|NO| G{E_2 shown on Remote Display/ Yellow LED Flash twice ?}
    G -->|YES| H["Problem is calibration lost. Recalibrate the scale using the procedures in Section 5."]
    G -->|NO| I{E_3 shown on RemoteDisplay/ Yellow LED Flash 3 times ?}
    I -->|YES| J["Problem is scale communication lost. Verify cable connections to/from the scale."]
    I -->|NO| K{E_4 shown on Remote Display/ Yellow LED Flash 4 times. Problem is Scale Load Cell failure.}
    J --> L{Is problem fixed ?}
    L -->|YES| M["DONE"]
    L -->|NO| N["Call Tech Support"]
    N --> O["Done"]
    L -->|YES| P["Calibrate scale."]
    P --> Q{Is problem fixed ?}
    Q -->|YES| R["DONE"]
    Q -->|NO| S{Is problem fixed ?}
    S -->|YES| T["DONE"]
    S -->|NO| U{Will the scale calibrate ?}
    U -->|YES| V["DONE"]
    U -->|NO| W["Call Tech Support"]
    W --> X["Done"]
    X --> Y{Is problem fixed ?}
    Y -->|YES| Z["DONE"]
    Y -->|NO| AA["Call Tech Support"]

Figure 46. Problem Isolation: Remote Display

graph TD
    A["REMOTE DISPLAY START"] --> B{Is the unit configured for a Remote Display?}
    B -->|NO| C["Use the programming bar codes in Section 6 to enable operation using a Remote Display"]
    B -->|YES| D["Verify that the Remote Display cable is securely attached to the external Remote Display port and reset the scanner."]
    C --> E{Is the problem fixed?}
    E -->|NO| F["DONE"]
    E -->|YES| G["Call Tech Support"]
    F --> H{Is the problem fixed?}
    H -->|NO| I["Re-connect using a known-good Remote Display. Reset the scanner and retest."]
    H -->|YES| J["Replace the Remote Display"]
    I --> K{Is the problem fixed?}
    K -->|NO| L["DONE"]
    K -->|YES| M["Call Tech Support"]

Figure 47. Problem Isolation: EAS System

graph TD
    A["NO EAS DEACTIVATION START"] --> B["Check all EAS cable connections."]
    B --> C{Does the EAS Antenna deactivate labels?}
    C -->|YES| D["DONE"]
    C -->|NO| E["Verify programmable parameters using the information and programming bar codes provided in Section 6. Check EAS options, and other configurable features."]
    E --> F{Does the EAS Antenna deactivate labels?}
    F -->|YES| G["DONE"]
    F -->|NO| H["If possible, retest the system substituting known-good EAS cable and/or other EAS equipment."]
    H --> I{Does the EAS Antenna deactivate labels?}
    I -->|YES| J["DONE"]
    I -->|NO| K["Call Tech Support."]
    B --> L["Before proceeding, verify the EAS Antenna and associated equipment have been correctly installed (ref. Chapter 2). Ensure operator has been trained in proper EAS system use (ref. Chapter 3)."]

NOTES

Chapter 5 Calibration

A number of situations require the scale to be calibrated. They are:

• at initial installation of the scanner/scale
• if the scale cannot be re-zeroed
• if you change the weight measure from pounds to kilograms or vice-versa
• if diagnostics indicate a calibration error
• the weigh module has been replaced

Follow the procedures on the following pages to ensure that the scanner/scale will meet Weights and Measurement requirements.

LEGAL NOTE

Certification of the scanner/scale's weighing apparatus is subject to Federal, State and Local Weights and Measures statutes and is restricted to authorized government agencies and/or duly registered agents thereof. Anytime a scale is calibrated, it should be properly sealed with a lead and wire or paper seal before being placed into service.

It is your responsibility to check with the appropriate authorities in your area to ensure compliance with pertinent regulations before removing any official seals or placing a newly calibrated scanner/ scale into service.

Description of Calibration Sequence

The Calibration Sequence sets the scale to an accurate reference point for weighing. This process involves the use of a Field Standard Weight Set (31.5–pounds) for calibration in pounds, (18.5–kilograms) for Metric. Once calibration has been successfully completed, the scanner/scale uses the certified weight as a reference for subsequent weighing activities.

These verification procedures follow the U.S. National Institute of Standards and Technology 44 Handbook guidelines for bench/counter scale installations.

If any of these tests fail to meet the required weight indications, you must calibrate the scanner/scale. Refer to the calibration procedures in this chapter for the proper procedures.

You may be required by state and/or local regulations to have procedures other than these performed by a certified technician or verification official.

Access to the calibration switch should be restricted with a paper or a wire and lead seal after the calibration has been performed if required by your local regulatory agency.

NOTE

The Calibration Sequence must be performed without removing the scanner/scale from its installed position.

The following tools and supplies will be required to perform the calibration process:

- 31.5 pound Field Standard Weight Set ^1 . (English calibration only).

- 18.5 kilogram Field Standard Weight Set ^2 . (Metric calibration only).

- Lead/Wire or Paper Seal (as required by law).

1. Throughout the calibration procedures, specified weights may be achieved by using a combination of weights from this set. eg. 20 lbs may be made up of one 10.00 lb. weight and two 5.00 lb. weights.

2. Throughout the calibration procedures, specific weights may be achieved by using a combination of weights from this set. eg. 10 kgs. may be made up of one 5.00 kg. and five 1.00 kg. weights.

Motion Test

This test verifies that the scale will not ‘zero’ when the weighing surface of the scanner/scale is in motion.

1. Verify that the Yellow LED ^1 is on and the Remote Display reads 0.00 pounds or 0.000 kilograms.
2. Press lightly on the weigh platter of the scanner/scale with one hand and at the same time press and release the Zero Push Button on the operator's panel. The Yellow LED should turn Off and the Remote Display should not display 0.00 pounds or 0.000 kilograms.
3. Remove your hand from the weighing platform and verify that the Yellow LED is On and the Remote Display reads 0.00 pounds or 0.000 kilograms.

Automatic Zero Tracking Test

This test verifies that the scanner/scale automatic zero tracking mechanism is operating correctly.

1. Place 0.006 pounds (3 grams for metric) on the center of the weighing platform. The entire weight must be placed on the weighing platform at once for this test to be valid. The Yellow LED should go Off and the Remote Display should read 0.01 pounds (0.005 kilograms).

NOTE

The scanner/scale has an adaptive zero capture mechanism that re-zeros the scale over time if there is a slow change in the zero level; thus if all the weight is not placed on the weighing surface at one time, the Yellow LED will remain On and the Remote Display will read 0.00 pounds (0.000 kilograms). When the weight is removed, the Yellow LED will turn off and the display will show a minus sign. Press the Zero Push Button to re-zero the scale.

Preparing the Scanner/Scale for Calibration

1. Assure that the scanner/scale is stable, secure and properly installed. (Refer to Chapter 2, Site Preparation and Installation, for instructions on the proper installation of the scanner/ scale).
2. Power-up the scanner/scale.
3. Allow the unit to reach temperature equilibrium for at least one hour. If the scanner/scale is already at room temperature, allow at least 15 minutes for acclimatization.
4. Remove all weight from the weighing surface and ensure that there are no obstructions in the debris chutes of the scanner/ scale. See Figure 8.

NOTE

Do not pay attention to any message on the POS display.

Calibrating the Scale (Pounds & Kilograms)

1. Before proceeding, ensure that the scanner/scale has been prepared for this process by performing the preceding steps titled, Preparing the Scanner/Scale for Calibration on page 84.
2. Remove the weigh platter and make sure that there are no obstructions in the debris chutes.
3. Cut and remove the seal that secures the calibration switch access cover as shown in Figure 48. The seal may not be present if this is the initial installation of the scanner/scale.

Figure 48. Calibration Switch Access

1. Press and release the Calibration Switch to place the scanner/ scale in Calibration Mode. (The scanner/scale will sound a a series of rapid beeps indicating it is in Calibration Mode.) If the motor was spinning when you initiated Calibration Mode, the motor will stop and the Yellow LED will begin flashing indicating the scale is in Calibration Mode. The Remote Display (if one is present) will show the message "ESCL" (empty scale).

2. Reinstall the weigh platter.

3. Press the Zero Push Button. The Yellow LED will go out for approximately 10 seconds (or less). If one is present, the

Remote Display will alternately display and --

- - - - until the scale is ready to proceed.

1. When the scale is ready, the Yellow LED will begin blinking again. The Remote Display (if one is present) will show the message "Ad20 (add twenty pounds)" or "Ad10 (add ten kilograms)." (The scanner/scale will also sound one tone if the scale is weighing in kilograms or two tones for pounds.) Place the correct weight (twenty pounds for calibration in pounds, or ten kilograms for metric calibration) from the Field Standard Weight set on the center of the weighing area and press the Zero Push Button again.

2. The Yellow LED will extinguish for approximately 10 seconds and, if one is present, the Remote Display will alternately display and until the scale is ready to proceed.

3. If the calibration was successful, (the speaker sounds a single tone), the Scale Status LED begins blinking again, and 'End-' appears in the Remote Display (if one is present).

4. If the calibration was not successful, the speaker will sound five tones indicating a scale failure, and the Scale Status LED will blink twice, strobe (fast blinks) and then continually repeat this sequence until reset. Remove all weight from the Weigh Platter, and repeat the procedure starting with step 7.

5. Press the Zero Push Button again to permanently store the calibration data and exit Calibration Mode. You have completed the calibration of the scanner/scale. The unit's calibration must now be verified as required by state and/or local weights and measures regulations. The verification procedure must be performed to assure that a scale will pass Weights and Measures requirements before it is placed into commercial/retail service.

You have completed the scale calibration procedure. You must now continue with the calibration verification tests to complete the scale's calibration. If you are weighing in pounds, continue with the following procedures to verify that the scale was successfully calibrated and that it weighs properly. If you are weighing in kilograms, turn to the instructions titled, Calibration Verification (Kilograms) on page 91, later in this chapter.

Calibration Verification (U.S. Pounds)

Once you have completed the calibration sequence, you may be required to perform these step-by-step verification procedures. These procedures follow the National Institute of Standards and Technology Handbook-44 guidelines for grocery scale installations. You may be required by state or local law to have these procedures performed by a certified technician or verified by a proper official.

These calibration verification procedures cover five different tests:

• Increasing-Load Test
• Shift Test
• Blanking Test
• Decreasing-Load Test
• Return to Zero Test

Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1)

This test checks Scale operation with five, ten and fifteen pound weights.

1. Check that the display reads 0.00 lb. when at rest with nothing on the weighing surface. (The Yellow LED is steadily lit).
2. Place a five-pound weight on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 5.00 lb.
3. Place an additional five pounds on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 9.99 and 10.01 lb.
4. Place an additional five pounds on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 14.99 and 15.01. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.00.
5. You have completed the Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1).

Shift Test

The Shift Test checks to ensure that items placed anywhere on the weighing surface of the scanner/scale are weighed properly. Refer to Figure 49 when performing this test.

1. Place and remove in succession, a ten-pound load on the center of each of the four quadrants (1, 2, 3, and 4 in Figure 5-2) of the scanner/scale's weigh platter. Verify that a reading of between 9.99 and 10.01 lb registers under load and that the display returns to 0.00 between each load.

2. After verifying the accuracy of each quadrant of the weighing surface, remove all weight from the scale. You have completed the Shift Test.

Figure 49. Shift Test

Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2)

After completing the Shift Test, you must complete the Increasing Load Test using 20.0, 25.0 and 30.0 pounds of weight.

NOTE

The upper limit of the scale is configurable according to POS interface type and may not necessarily be set at 30 pounds, which is the standard setting. For this test, continue to place weights in five pound increments only up to the upper weight limit set for your scale.

1. With the scale starting at zero, place 20.0 pounds in the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 19.99 and 20.01 lb.
2. Place an additional five pounds in the center of the weighing surface, increasing the load to 25.0 pounds and check that the display reads between 24.99 and 25.01 lb.
3. Place an additional five pounds in the center of the weighing surface increasing the load to 30.0 pounds and check that the display reads between 29.99 and 30.01 lb.
4. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.00.

Blanking Test

This test ensures that the scanner/scale will indicate its weighing capability has been exceeded if a weight greater than 0.05 pounds over its maximum upper weight limit is placed upon the unit.

1. Place weights that total the upper weight limit plus 0.051 pounds on the scale. For example: If the upper limit is set at 30 pounds, place weights equaling 30.051 pounds.
2. Verify that the display shows a dash and three hyphens (_ -- - ). This is the overweight indication.

NOTE

The scanner/scale may blank (show an underscore and three hyphens) at any weight greater than its upper limit, but must blank when the upper limit plus 0.051 pounds are set upon the weighing surface.

Decreasing-Load Test

This test ensures that the scanner/scale responds properly when a heavy object is followed by a significantly smaller object.

1. Place a 30.0-pound load on the scale and verify that the display shows between 29.99 and 30.01 pounds.

If the upper weight limit for your scale is not set at 30 pounds, begin by placing weight equaling your upper limit setting.

1. Remove weights to leave 20 pounds on the scale. Check that the display shows between 19.99 and 20.01.

2. Remove another 15.0 pounds from the scale and check that the scale reads 5.00 lb.

3. You have completed the Decreasing Load Test.

Return to Zero Test

This test ensures that, after all other tests have been completed successfully, the scanner/scale returns to zero. Remove all weights from the scale and verify that the scale reads 0.00 lb.

After completing this test, close the calibration access cover and seal per local Weights and Measures requirements. This final step must agree with the legal requirements of your state or local government.

You have completed the calibration and verification process for weighing in pounds.

If the scanner/scale passes all these tests,

1. Remove the weigh platter, install the calibration switch cover and install a seal (if required).
2. Reinstall the weigh platter.

If the scanner/scale fails any of these tests, it should be serviced by a qualified technician.

Calibration Verification (Kilograms)

Once you have completed the calibration sequence, you may be required to perform these step-by-step verification procedures. These procedures follow the National Institute of Standards and Technology Handbook-44 guidelines for grocery scale installations. You may be required by state or local law to have these procedures performed by a certified technician or verified by a proper official.

These calibration verification procedures cover five different tests:

• Increasing-Load Test
• Shift Test
• Blanking Test
• Decreasing-Load Test
• Return to Zero Test

Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1)

This test checks Scale operation for increasing loads from 0.100 kg and 7.50 kg.

1. Check that the display reads 0.000 kg when at rest with nothing on the weighing surface. (The Yellow LED is steadily lit).
2. Place a 100 gram weight on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.100 kg.
3. Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.300 kg.
4. Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.500 kg.
5. Place an additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.600 kg.
6. Place an additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.700 kg.
7. Place an additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.800 kg.

8. Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 1.000 kg.

9. Increase the weight on the scale to 7.50 kg on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 7.495 and 7.505 kg.

10. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.000 kg. You have completed the Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1).

Shift Test (Metric)

The Shift Test checks to ensure that items placed anywhere on the weighing surface of the scanner/scale are weighed properly. Refer to Figure 50 when performing this test.

1. Place and remove in succession, a 5.0 kilogram load on the center of each of the four quadrants (2, 3, 4, and 5 in Figure 50) and in the center (1) of the scanner/scale's weighing platform. Verify that the display shows a reading of between 4.995 and 5.005 kg for each quadrant/center test and that the display returns to 0.000 between each load.
2. After verifying the accuracy of each quadrant and the center of the weighing surface, remove all weight from the scale. You have completed the Shift Test.

Figure 50. European Shift Test (Metric)

Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2)

NOTE

After completing the Shift Test, you must complete the Increasing Load Test using 10.00, 12.50 and 15 kilograms of weight.

The upper limit of the scale is configurable according to POS interface type and may not necessarily be set at 15 kilograms, which is the standard setting. For this test, continue to place weights in 2.50 kilogram increments only up to the upper weight limit set for your scale.

1. Place 10.00 kilograms in the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 9.990 kg and 10.010 kg.
2. Place an additional 2.50 kilograms in the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 12.490 kg and 12.510 kg.
3. Place an additional 2.50 kilograms in the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 14.990 kg and 15.010 kg.
4. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.000 kg.
5. You have completed phase two of the increasing load test.

Blanking Test

This test ensures that the scanner/scale will indicate its weighing capability has been exceeded if a weight greater than 0.82 over its maximum upper weight limit is placed upon the unit.

1. Place weights that total the upper limit plus 0.82 kilograms on the weigh platter. For example: If the upper limit is set at 15 kilograms, place weights equaling 15.82 kilograms.
2. Verify that the display shows a dash and three hyphens ( _ -- -). This is the overweight indication.

NOTE

The scanner/scale may blank (show an underscore and three hyphens) at any weight greater than its upper limit, but must blank when the upper limit plus 0.82 pounds are set upon the weighing surface.

Decreasing-Load Test

This test ensures that the scanner/scale responds properly when a heavy object is followed by a significantly smaller object.

1. Place weights that total 15.8 kilograms.

NOTE

If the upper weight limit for your scale is not set at 15 kilograms, begin by placing weight equaling your upper limit setting plus 0.8 kilograms.

1. Remove weights to leave 10 kilograms on the scale and verify that the display shows between 9.990 and 10.010 kilograms.
2. Remove an additional 9.00 kilograms from the scale and check that the scale reads 1.000 kg.
3. You have completed the Decreasing Load Test.

Return to Zero Test

This test ensures that, after all other tests have been completed successfully, the scanner/scale returns to zero. Without any weight on the weigh platter, verify that the scale reads 0.000 kg.

You have completed the calibration and verification process for weighing in kilograms.

If the scanner/scale passes all these tests,

1. Remove the weigh platter, install the calibration switch cover and install a seal (if required).
2. Reinstall the weigh platter.

If the scanner/scale fails any of these tests, it should be serviced by a qualified technician.

Chapter 6

Programming

Introduction to Label Programming

The programming bar code labels contained in this manual will allow you to customize and configure features and settings for your scanner (scanner/scale). To ensure full compatibility and proper function, use only the programming bar codes in this manual and other product-specific publications to program scanner features.

This manual has been developed to make it quick and easy for users of all levels to find the information needed to understand and configure features. The following descriptions will help you to determine where to go from here.

Understanding the Basics

If you have little or no prior experience with programming using bar code labels, you should review the first few pages of this chapter to familiarize yourself with the basics of scanner programming before performing any changes to your configuration.

Integrating the Scanner With Your Host System

Your scanner MUST be equipped with the correct hardware (interface board, cable, etc.) to properly communicate with your host system. Contact your dealer for information if you have questions about your scanner's hardware compatibility.

You may also want to contact the dealer or your system administrator if you have no record of how your scanner was pre-programmed at the factory. Scanners are typically programmed with the default settings for specific interface types (see Appendix F, Factory

Defaults, for more information); however, your scanner may have been custom configured with settings that are unique to your company or application.

Once you know the scanner's current settings, you can determine what changes will be required to allow communication with your host system and/or optional features you choose to modify to customize your installation. After recording the modifications needed, finish reading this chapter, then turn to the appropriate page and follow the instructions to program the scanner.

When all scanner features are programmed to your satisfaction, the scanner is ready to be placed into operation.

Customizing Your Scanner's Operation

Most scanner programming falls within three general categories:

• General Scanner Features on page 106 — are features common to all interface types. Examples include beeper adjustments such as volume and length, read verification settings, etc.
• EAS Features on page 146 — control the settings for interfacing with the [optional] EAS device.
• Interface Related Features on page 148 — are the mandatory settings necessary to allow communication with your host terminal. Examples of these settings are: RS-232 baud rate and parity.

CAUTION

It is possible, via programming bar codes, to change the interface type (for example: from RS-232 to IBM Port 17). Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

Ensure that your planned modifications are compatible with the current interface. For example, baud rate selections are only valid in the RS-232 interface. The scanner will sound an error tone when scanning programming labels for features invalid to the current interface group.

- Symbology Programming on page 253 — gives the scanner the capability to autodiscriminate as few as one, and as many as all available symbologies. For optimal scanner performance enable only those symbologies required. Additionally the scanner may be programmed with the standard options available for the various symbologies, such as check digit, minimum label length, fixed and variable length bar codes, etc. If you experience difficulties, have questions or require additional information, contact your local distributor, or call your dealer or sales representative.

Programming Overview

The scanner's programmable feature settings can be modified to accommodate your system's unique requirements. These settings can be communicated to the scanner in one of three ways:

1. Commands can be sent directly from the host. A limited set of host commands are available. Refer to Appendix D for more details or contact Tech Support.
2. Programming bar code labels can also be used to modify the scanner's programmable settings. This manual provides the bar code labels and instructions necessary to configure the scanner's features and options.

NOTE

When you program the scanner using any of the methods above, the scanner will store the changes until reprogrammed or returned to factory defaults.

Programming via Handheld Device

The scanner can also accept programming via its auxiliary port using a handheld scanning device. Eligible handheld devices must have the ability to transmit Code 128 function codes such as the programming bar codes presented in this manual. Datalogic models QuickScan ^® 1000 and QuickScan ^® 6000 support this functionality. Handheld data format requirements (baud rate, parity, etc.) are presented in Appendix G of this manual. Additionally the programmable feature, Auxiliary Port Mode on page 118, must be set to “External Handheld Input” to allow operation.

What Is Programming Mode?

Programming Mode is a state in which the scanner must be placed in order to accept commands via programming bar code labels.

When programming using the bar code labels in this manual, the scanner is typically placed in Programming Mode by scanning the SWITCH label.

While in the Programming Mode, the scanner only recognizes ONLY the special programming bar codes contained in this programming guide. See Appendix A for information about scanner indications while in Programming Mode.

Entering and Exiting Programming Mode.

Use the bar code label below to enter and exit ('switch' into and out of) Programming Mode.

SWITCH LABEL

Programming Session

A typical programming session is conducted as follows:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code to place the scanner in Programming Mode. Depending upon its current programming, the scanner may emit a beep or beeps, indicating it has read the bar code and the scanner (top) green LED will flash on and off slowly while the scanner remains in Programming Mode. Normal scanning functions are disabled.
2. Scan the programming bar code(s) that is (are) specially encoded to make the desired changes. With few exceptions ^1 , the scanner will emit a triple beep each time you scan a valid programming bar code.

NOTE
Not all features are available for all interfaces and the scanner will sound an error tone when scanning programming bar codes for features invalid to the current interface. Only features supported by the currently active interface will be implemented.

NOTE

If a bar code is scanned that changes the scanner's interface, all previous configuration items scanned in the programming session are lost.

Additionally, when programming a feature requiring you to scan single digits to set a multi-digit number, such as Minimum Label Length, scanning the SWITCH bar code (or any item tag/item value bar code) before completing all input will result in an error tone and cause the scanner to exit Programming Mode. Under these circumstances, the current feature you were trying to set is thrown out; any previous bar codes scanned during the session will take effect.

NOTE

It is recommended that programming sessions be limited to one feature at a time. Should you make a mistake in the programming sequence, it can be difficult to discover where an error has been made if several features are programmed at once. Additionally, it can be confusing to determine which features may or may not have been successfully set following such a session.

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code to save any new settings and exit Programming Mode. The scanner will sound a beep and reset upon exiting Programming Mode, and the green LED will return to its usual state (on steady or off).

The scanner will exit Programming Mode under the following conditions:

— the programming sequence has been completed or the SWITCH bar code is scanned
— five minutes have passed without scanning activity. Any data programmed during the current session will be ignored ^1 , and the scanner will reset and revert to its condition previous to initiating the exited session.
— power is disconnected. Disconnecting power during Programming Mode, before scanning the SWITCH bar code, will cause all new settings to be ignored. On power-up, the scanner will return to previous settings.

1. Maintain a good record of all changes made to ensure that you know if the original factory settings have been changed.

2. Exception: If an interface bar code had been read while in Programming Mode, the scanner will operate on the default settings for the new interface.

Programming Sequence

To modify a scanner feature (item), the programming bar codes contained in this manual must be scanned in a given sequence depending upon the feature being programmed (as shown in Table 3). There are three possible programming sequences:

NOTE

If the scanner's interface type must be changed, always be sure that interface configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming session. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items to the factory default for that interface type.)

A. Programming sample A (the most commonly used format) demonstrates how three bar codes are scanned in sequence to do the following:

1. Place the scanner in Programming Mode (SWITCH bar code).

2. Scan the Item Tag ^1 that will enable the new feature.

3. End the programming session and reset the scanner (SWITCH bar code).

B. Sample B provides an example of a programming feature requiring the entry of a range value. Like sample A, the scanner is placed in Programming Mode and an Item Tag ^1 is scanned. Then, a value must be entered before ending the programming session. In the example, three digits must be scanned from the number pad in Appendix C. This type of format, requiring several bar codes, is necessary to allow flexible programming for item values with larger numeric ranges.

C. The programming sequence shown in example C requires scanning of a single, extended length bar code. This special programming bar code contains all the data necessary to enter Programming Mode, set the Item Tag ^1 and Item Value, and exit Programming Mode (all in one step).

1. An 'Item Tag" is a term used to describe an assigned number, which is encoded in a programming bar code, that toggles (selects, enables, disables, etc.) a specific programming feature.

Table 3. Programming Sequence

graph TD
    A["SET"] --> B["ITEM TAG ITEM VALUE"]
    B --> C["END/RESET"]
    D["A"] --> E["1 SWITCH"]
    D --> F["2 ENABLE NEW FEATURE"]
    D --> G["3 SWITCH"]
    H["B"] --> I["1 SWITCH SWITCH"]
    H --> J["2 ENABLE NEW FEATURE USING THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS..."]
    H --> K["3 0 8"]
    L["C"] --> M["1 ONE BAR CODE CONTAINS SWITCH + ITEM TAG + ITEM VALUE + SWITCH"]

LED and Beeper Indicators

The scanner provides a set of indicators that verify/announce the various scanner functions.

If You Make a Mistake...

If, during a programming session, you find that you are unsure of the scanner's settings or wish to reset the scanner's configuration, use the Return to Factory Settings label below to return the scanner's configuration to the factory settings. Scanning this label will also reset any changes made during previous programming sessions.

Return to Factory Settings

Scan this bar code to return the scanner to the default settings configured at the factory for the currently active interface. This bar code is typically used to return the scanner to a "known" operating state when the present programming status is not known, faulty, or suspect.

Use this bar code with caution, since it will reset ALL features that may have been programmed since the scanner's installation.

DO NOT scan the SWITCH bar code before and after scanning this bar code, as the bar code below automatically enters and exits Programming Mode as a part of its function. If this bar code is scanned following a SWITCH bar code, it will simply cause the scanner to exit Programming Mode without making changes.

RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS

Test Mode

Use this feature to place the scanner into a testing, or “demo” mode. This special mode disables the scanner interface, meaning that bar code data is not sent out to the host via the scanner interface. This allows the bar code to be scanned continuously without requiring a response from the POS terminal.

To return the scanner to normal function, scan the TEST MODE = DISABLE on page 105 bar code below.

NOTE

DO NOT scan the SWITCH bar code before and after scanning the bar codes on this page.

Scanning the TEST MODE = DISABLE on page 105 bar code sets the Double Read Timeout to 600ms.

TEST MODE = DISABLE

TEST MODE = ENABLE

General Scanner Features

Scanner Button Options

Allows configuration of the scanner (volume) button to different modes of operation.

• Disable Scanner Button — Disables all button functions
• Enable Standard Functions — Enables volume, tone, and reset.
• Enable Reset Only — The button's sole function will be to reset the scanner.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SCANNER BUTTON OPTIONS = DISABLE SCANNER BUTTON

Scanner Button Options (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

SCANNER BUTTON OPTIONS = ENABLE RESET ONLY

Double Read Timeout

The Double Read Timeout feature sets a time limit that determines how much time must pass before reading the same label again (e.g. two identical items in succession).

To set the Double Read Timeout:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

If the incidence of multiple reads is not acceptable, increase the Double Read Timeout setting to a higher value.

NOTE

DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 400ms

DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 600ms

Double Read Timeout (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 800ms

DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 1 SECOND

Laser Timeout

The laser timeout feature sets the time for switching the visible laser diodes (VLDs) off if the scanner is idle. Using this feature can prolong the life of the VLDs.

To set the Laser Timeout:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

LASER TIMEOUT = 5 MINUTES

Laser Timeout (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

LASER TIMEOUT = 10 MINUTES

LASER TIMEOUT = 15 MINUTES

Motor Timeout

NOTE

The Motor Timeout feature sets the time for automatically switching the motor off when the scanner is not in use.

Laser safety requires that the laser switch off before the motor. If you set the motor timeout shorter than the laser timeout, the motor and the laser will both shut off when the motor timeout expires.

To set the Motor Timeout:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

MOTOR TIMEOUT = 5 MINUTES

Motor Timeout (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

MOTOR TIMEOUT = 10 MINUTES

MOTOR TIMEOUT = 15 MINUTES

Motor Timeout (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

MOTOR TIMEOUT = 30 MINUTES

MOTOR TIMEOUT = 60 MINUTES

Label Gone Timeout

Specifies the amount of time that data segments are stored by the software before being discarded if a label has not been successfully decoded during the current “label in volume session,” which is defined as the time between when the label gone time is first started until the label gone timer expires.

To set the Label Gone Timeout:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Label Gone Timeout (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

LABEL GONE TIMEOUT = 160 mS

LABEL GONE TIMEOUT = 250 mS

Label Gone Timeout (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

LABEL GONE TIMEOUT = 500 mS

LABEL GONE TIMEOUT = 1 Second

Auxiliary Port Mode

Selects the usage for the scanner's optional auxiliary port. The choices listed below are mutually exclusive (only one option can be active at a time).

• Disabled — Port is inactive
- External Handheld Input — Supports Datalogic ^ handheld scanners (QuickScan 1000, QuickScan 6000, PowerScan) as well as other models such as the Symbol ^ HotShot. Call your dealer for more information about supported devices.

NOTE

Cable pinout information for the Auxiliary Port is provided in Appendix B of this manual. A connected handheld scanner must be configured to transmit data as outlined in Appendix G.

- PIR/CT — PIR (Productivity Index Reporting) is a value-added feature which allows the scanner to provide information to an external computer indicating how easy the label was to read. CT (Checker Training) is also a value-added feature which allows the scanner to provide feedback to the cashier on how to scan in a more ergonomic fashion.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

AUXILIARY PORT MODE = DISABLE

Auxiliary Port Mode (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

AUXILIARY PORT MODE = EXTERNAL HANDHELD INPUT

AUXILIARY PORT MODE = PIR/CT

Auxiliary Port Baud Rate

Specifies the baud rate of the auxiliary port when operating in PIR/CT mode.

NOTE

PIR/CT is a value-added feature which may not have been activated on your model.

To specify the Auxiliary Port Baud Rate:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired baud rate from the bar codes below and on the immediately following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Auxiliary Port Baud Rate (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 4800

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 9600

Auxiliary Port Baud Rate (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Auxiliary Port Baud Rate (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 57600

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 115200

Laser Failure Mode

This configuration item selects whether the scanner should continue operating if only one laser is functional. (The scanner has two lasers: One for the horizontal window, and one for the vertical window.) Options for this feature are:

- Single Laser Failure OK — The scanner can still operate even if one laser is no longer functional. In this mode the scanner will read only from the window associated with the operational laser. This provides the user the ability to continue working until the unit is serviced. The 7-segment display will show the error code for the failed laser (reference Chapter 4, Error Codes), but the scanner will continue to function.

- Single Laser Failure Fatal — If it is desirable to have maximum performance or nothing at all, Laser Failure Mode should be selected as fatal. Upon single laser failure, the scanner will sound an error tone and cease scanning functions until serviced.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Productivity Index Reporting (PIR)/Cashier Training (CT)

When PIR/CT is enabled, label quality data is appended to decoded data before being presented to the POS. The PIR feature allows the scanner to provide information to an external computer indicating how easy the label was to read. CT allows the scanner to provide feedback to the cashier on how to scan in a more ergonomic fashion.

NOTE

This value-added feature is a factory-programmed option. Contact your dealer for information about upgrading your system to include this advanced capability.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

PIR/CT = DISABLE

PIR/CT = ENABLE

Indication Features

Green LED Idle State

This feature specifies the state of the green scanner LED when the scanner is idle and ready to read a label. Options are:

• Off
  . O n d i m

To set the LED Idle State:

1. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
2. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

GREEN LED IDLE STATE = OFF

GREEN LED IDLE STATE = ON DIM

Power-up Beep Control

Specifies the type of audible indication that is made when entering scanner-active mode on power-up. Choices are:

• N o b e e p
- One beep
- Three beeps

To set the Power-up Beep:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the three bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

POWER-UP BEEP = OFF

POWER-UP BEEP = ONE BEEP

Good Read Beep Control

This feature enables/disables scanner beep upon successfully decoding of a label.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

GOOD READ BEEP = DISABLE

GOOD READ BEEP = ENABLE

Good Read Beep Frequency

Adjusts the scanner's good read beep to sound at low, medium, or high frequency (controls the beeper's pitch/tone).

• Low = 660 Hz
  • Medium = 860 Hz
• High = 1050 Hz

To set the Good Read Beep Frequency:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the three bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY = LOW

Good Read Beep Frequency (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY = HIGH

Good Read Beep Length

Specifies the duration of a good read beep.

To set the good read beep length:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.

2. Scan the bar code, SET GOOD READ BEEP LENGTH on page 131. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired good read beep length setting. The selectable range is 1–255, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001–255).

Examples:

$$ \begin{array}{l} 0 0 1 = 1 0 \mathrm{ms} \ 0 0 5 = 5 0 \mathrm{ms} \ 0 4 0 = 4 0 0 \mathrm{ms} \ 2 5 0 = 2, 5 0 0 \mathrm{ms} (2. 5 \text { seconds }) \ \end{array} $$

1. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned

Good Read Beep Volume

Selects the beeper volume upon a good read beep. There are five selectable volumes, with each volume increment adding approximately five decibels to the previous level:

$$ \begin{array}{l} \cdot \quad 0 = \text { L o w e s t V o l u m e } \ \cdot 1 = \text { M e d i u m } - \text { L o w V o l u m e } \ \cdot 2 = \text { M e d i u m V o l u m e } \ \cdot 3 = \text { H i g h e s t V o l u m e } \ \end{array} $$

To set the Good Read Beep Volume:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selected volume bar code from this or the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = LOWEST

Good Read Beep Volume (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = MEDIUM LOW

GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = MEDIUM

Good Read Beep Volume (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Good Read When to Indicate

This feature specifies when the scanner will provide indication (beep and/or flash its green LED) upon successfully reading a bar code.

• Good Read = Indicate after decode
• Good Read = Indicate after transmit
- Good Read = Indicate after CTS goes inactive, then active

NOTE

The "Indicate after CTS goes inactive..." mode applies to RS-232 STD and RS-232 WN interfaces only. If set to this mode in other interfaces, "Indicate after decode" mode will be implemented.

To set the Good Read When to Indicate feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired mode bar code from this page. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

GOOD READ = INDICATE AFTER DECODE

Good Read When to Indicate (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

GOOD READ = INDICATE AFTER CTS GOES INACTIVE, THEN ACTIVE

(RS-232 ONLY)

Scale Features

Scale Enable

NOTE

Use this feature to enable or disable scale operation.

Recalibration/recertification may be required when adding scale functionality. Consult your local Weights and Measures authority.

If this feature is enabled the scanner will expect that it is to function as a scanner-scale, and will indicate an error if it is not a scale-equipped unit. See Chapter 4, Error Codes, for more information.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SCALE = DISABLE

SCALE = ENABLE

Scale Enforced Zero Return

This feature enables/disables the enforced zero return of the scale. Three settings are available for this feature:

• Dis a b l e
• Scale Must Return to Zero Weight Within Two Minutes — Scale will require re-zeroing if a non-zero weight is left on for more than two minutes or if the scale is below zero.
• Scale Must Return to Zero Weight Between Weight Requests — Re-zeroing is required if weight doesn't return to zero between weight requests from the POS, plus scale will require re-zeroing if a non-zero weight is left on for more than two minutes or if the scale is below zero.
• Non-Zero for Two Minutes — Re-zeroing is required if weight does not return to zero within two minutes.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. The strategy is to select the lowest possible filter level needed that allows normal scale operation.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SCALE ENFORCED ZERO RETURN = DISABLE

Scale Enforced Zero Return (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

SCALE ENFORCED ZERO RETURN =

NON-ZERO FOR 2 MINUTES OR BELOW ZERO

SCALE ENFORCED ZERO RETURN = NON-ZERO FOR 2 MINUTES OR BELOW ZERO

OR NO ZERO BETWEEN WEIGHTS

Scale Enforced Zero Return (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Scale Interface Type

Use this feature to select the scale interface type. Choices are:

• No Scale Interface
  • RS-232 — SASI
• RS-232 — ICL

To set the Scale Interface Type:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SCALE INTERFACE TYPE = NO SCALE INTERFACE

SCALE INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 — SASI

Scale Interface Type (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

SCALE INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 — ICL

Scale Calibration Notification

When enabled, this feature allows the host to be notified of a calibration event.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SCALE CALIBRATION NOTIFICATION = DISABLE

SCALE CALIBRATION NOTIFICATION = ENABLE

Scale Intercharacter Delay

Sets the delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next, in 10 millisecond increments.

To specify the intercharacter delay:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below, SET KEYBOARD WEDGE INTERCHARACTER DELAY on page 252. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired delay. The selectable range is 0–100, which is the delay in 10–millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000–100).
   Examples:
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

$$ \begin{array}{l} 0 0 1 = 1 0 \mathrm{ms} \ 0 0 5 = 5 0 \mathrm{ms} \ 0 4 0 = 4 0 0 \mathrm{ms} \ 1 0 0 = 1, 0 0 0 \mathrm{ms} (1 \text { second }) \ \end{array} $$

SCALE INTERCHARACTER DELAY

Remote Display — Enable/Disable

The scanner-scale can be configured to operate with or without a Remote Display.

NOTE

Recalibration/recertification may be required when adding a Remote Display. Consult your local Weights and Measures authority.

If this feature is enabled the scanner-scale will expect that it is connected to a Remote Display, and will indicate an error if one is not. See Chapter 4, Error Codes, for more information.

REMOTE DISPLAY = DISABLE

EAS Features

EAS Active State

Specifies the active state polarity of EAS (Electronic Article Surveillance); the inactive state is its opposite polarity. EAS output goes active during the good read indication of a bar code, allowing the EAS device to deactivate a tag on the product.

To set the EAS Active State:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EAS ACTIVE STATE = ACTIVE LOW

EAS ACTIVE STATE = ACTIVE HIGH

EAS Timeout

Specifies the amount of time that an EAS (Electronic Article Surveillance) signal is held in its active state for a good read indication.

To set the EAS Timeout:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.

2. Scan the bar code, SET EAS TIMEOUT on page 147 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired EAS Timeout duration. The selectable range is 0–255, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000–255).

Examples:

000 = EAS timeout disabled

001 = 10ms

005 = 50ms

040 = 400ms

250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds)

NOTE

A setting of 0 (000) disables this feature.

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code to exit Programming Mode.

SET EAS TIMEOUT

Interface Related Features

Interface Type

Specifies the current scanner interface. Selections are:

INTERFACE (I/F) TYPE	I/F I.D. NUMBERa
RS-232 Standard	05
RS-232 Wincor-Nix-dorf	12
RS-232 Single Cable	20
OEM USB	45
IBM Port 17	04
IBM Port 5B	08
IBM Port 9B	23
USB Keyboard	35
NOT USER-SELECTABLE Keyboard
Null Interface	7-segment FRU display indi-cates 0 at start-up (accompa-nied by trill beep for approx. 2 seconds)

INTERFACE (I/F) TYPE	I/F I.D. NUMBERa
Keyboard Wedge A	25
Keyboard Wedge B	26
Keyboard Wedge C	27
Keyboard Wedge D	28
Keyboard Wedge E	29
Keyboard Wedge F	2A
Keyboard Wedge G	31
Keyboard Wedge H	32
Keyboard Wedge I	33
Wedge J	34

a. To access a scanner's interface identification number, place the scanner in Scanner Diagnostic Mode and view the 7-segment FRU display (reference Chapter 2, Scanner Diagnostic Mode, for more information).

Interface Type (continued)

NOTE
A new scanner may have been shipped from the factory with a Null Interface (no interface type selected) to ensure system compatibility at installation. In this case, the correct Interface Type programming bar code must be scanned first before the scanner can be used with a POS system.

NOTE

If the scanner's interface type must be changed, always be sure that interface configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming session. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items to the factory default for that interface type.)

To select the desired interface:

CAUTION
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

NOTE

When an interface is selected, the scanner loads the factory configuration for that interface as the selection is made, erasing any and all custom configuration that may have previously been done.

1. Disconnect current interface cable(s) if currently connected.
2. Scan the SWITCH bar code
3. Scan the bar code representing the appropriate interface located on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes adjacent to and on any facing pages to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

NOTE

Once the correct interface has been set, it will be necessary to proceed to the appropriate pages in this manual that select parameters and options for that interface. For example, if RS-232 is selected, turn to the pages in this manual headed as features specific to the RS-232 interface.

1. Connect new interface cable(s).

RS-232 Interface Selection

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 STANDARD

RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf Interface Selection

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 WINCOR-NIXDORF

RS-232 Single Cable Interface Selection

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal (host) port. The Scale Host port connection is not used for this interface.

INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 SINGLE CABLE

OEM USB Interface Selection

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal (host) port. The Scale Host port connection is not used for this interface.

CAUTION

NOTE

IBM Port 17 Interface Selection

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal (host) port. The Scale Host port connection is not used for this interface.

INTERFACE TYPE = IBM PORT 17

IBM Port 5B Interface Selection

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CAUTION

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

INTERFACE TYPE = IBM PORT 5B

IBM Port 9B Interface Selection

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

USB Keyboard Interface Selection

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

INTERFACE TYPE = USB KEYBOARD

Keyboard Wedge A Interface Selection

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE A

Keyboard Wedge B Interface Selection

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE B

Keyboard Wedge C Interface Selection

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE C

Keyboard Wedge D Interface Selection

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE D

Keyboard Wedge E Interface Selection

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE E

Keyboard Wedge F Interface Selection

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CAUTION

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE F

Keyboard Wedge G Interface Selection

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE G

Keyboard Wedge H Interface Selection

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE H

Keyboard Wedge I Interface Selection

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE I

Keyboard Wedge J Interface Selection

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CAUTION

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE J

Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length

Specifies the maximum number of data characters allowed in messages transmitted to the host.

To set the Maximum Host–Transmitted Message Length:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET MAXIMUM HOST-TRANSMITTED MES-SAGE LENGTH on page 168 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired maximum host-transmitted message length. The selectable range is 0–249 data characters. (Labels that are longer than this length are not read.) Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000–249).

NOTE

If this configuration item is set to 0 (000), there is no general length limit imposed on data being transmitted to the host.

1. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned

SET MAXIMUM HOST-TRANSMITTED MESSAGE LENGTH

Number of Host Transmission Buffers

Specifies the number of host transmission(s) that may be buffered. By buffering data from a bar code, the scanner can continue to read a new bar code while the old one is being transmitted to the host.

Selecting BUFFERS = 1 means that the first bar code must be transmitted before a new one can be read. A selection of BUFFERS = 2 means that a new bar code can be read while data from the first bar code is transmitted. When the feature, Good Read Beep Control on page 128, is enabled, the scanner will beep when the data is placed in a transmission buffer.

When a DISABLE SCANNER command is received from the host, the scanner will continue to transmit all data that is buffered.

To select the Number of Host Transmission Buffers:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan bar code below representing the desired setting. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

AIM ID

AIM label identifiers (as opposed to custom characters you select yourself as with label identifiers) can be included with scanned bar code data. AIM label identifiers consist of three characters as follows:

- A close brace character (ASCII ‘]’), followed by...

• A code character (see the table below), followed by

- A modifier character (the modifier character is symbol dependent)

SYMBOLOGY CHAR SYMBOLOGY CHAR
UPC/EAN	E	MSI/Plossey	M
Code 39	A	PDF 417	L
Codabar	F	DataBar Omnidirec-tional, DataBar Expanded (RSS)	e
Interleaved.2 of 5	I	Standard 2 of 5	S
Code 93	G	ISBN	X^a
Code 128/EAN 128	C

a. ISBN (X with a 0 modifier character)

Figure 51. AIM ID

AIM ID (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

AIM ID: DISABLE

AIM ID: ENABLE

Label ID Control

A Label ID is used to identify a barcode (symbology) type. See Appendix D, Default Settings, for a listing for common symbologies. It can be appended previous to or following the transmitted barcode data depending upon how this option is enabled. This feature provides options for configuring custom Label IDs individually per symbology. If you wish to program the scanner to always include an industry standard label identifier for ALL symbology types, see the previous feature, AIM ID.

The Label ID is a customizable code of up to three ASCII characters (each of which are 00-FF) followed by a control character (00-01), This control character, when set to zero, does nothing. When set to one, it appends the symbology's AIM ID to the Label ID.

When the control character is set to 01 for UPC-A and UPC-E, it expands the label to EAN-13 and thus follows the EAN-13 Label ID settings.

Label IDs cannot be modified when using the OEM-USB interface.

To configure a Label ID:

1. Scan the START barcode.
2. Select Label ID position as either BEFORE or AFTER by scanning the appropriate barcode.
3. Determine the desired character(s) (you may choose up to three) which will represent the Label ID for the selected symbology. Next, turn to the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual and find the equivalent hex digits associated with your choice of Label ID. For example, the default Label ID for Code 39 for the Single Cable RS-232 interface is 'B' '1'. To change it to 'R' '4', the following should be performed:
4. Scan the Switch label
5. Scan the 'Set Code 39 Label ID' label
6. Scan '5'
7. Scan '2'
8. Scan '3'

Label ID Control (continued)

• Scan 4'
• Scan '0'
• Scan '0'
• Scan '0'
• Scan '0'
• Scan the Switch label

Figure 52. Label ID Position Options

graph TD
    A["SCANNER"] --> B["Prefix SuffixLabel ID Label IDBar code DataAim ID"]
    B --> C["OR"]
    C --> D["Arrow to SuffixLabel ID Label IDBar code DataAim ID"]
    D --> E["Arrow to OR"]

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Label ID Control (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

LABEL ID TRANSMISSION: AFTER BAR CODE DATA

Global Prefix

This feature specifies the prefix that is added to beginning of label transmission.

To specify the Global Prefix Character(s):

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GLOBAL PREFIX on page 176 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the hex designation for the desired character(s). A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF. Up to 20 hex pairs can be designated.

NOTE

To specify "no Global Prefix," scan 00.

1. If designating the full 20 hex pairs, the scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned. If designating less than 20 hex pairs, you can end the programming sequence early by scanning the TERMINATE SEQUENCE on page 176 bar code.

2. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Global Prefix (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

SET GLOBAL PREFIX

TERMINATE SEQUENCE

Global Suffix

This feature specifies the suffix that is added to end of a label transmission. Three standard options are available below. Contact your dealer for other alternate settings for this feature.

• No Global Suffix
• CR — Carriage Return
  • CR LF — Carriage Return, Line Feed

To set the Global Suffix:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

GLOBAL SUFFIX = NO GLOBAL SUFFIX

Global Suffix (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

GLOBAL SUFFIX = CR

GLOBAL SUFFIX = CR LF

Case Conversion

Changes the case of all alphabetic characters to upper or lower case.

Choices are:

No case conversion

U p p e r c a s e

L o w e r c a s e

To configure this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.

2. Scan your selection from the case conversion bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CASE CONVERSION = NO CASE CONVERSION

Case Conversion (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CASE CONVERSION = LOWER CASE

IBM Features

IBM Interface Options

IBM interfaces offer specific control over interaction with certain devices.

NOTE

The OEM USB interface provides its own set of options. Refer to the feature, OEM USB Scanner Device Type on page 188, in this chapter.

Options for this feature are as follows:

• FULL host interface support — Accepts scanner and scale configuration host commands.
• Ignore host interface configuration of scanner and scale — Ignores all scanner and scale configuration host commands.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

IBM INTERFACE OPTION = FULL HOST INTERFACE SUPPORT

IBM INTERFACE OPTION = IGNORE HOST I/F CONFIG OF SCANNER & SCALE

IBM Number of Host Resets

Specifies how many consecutive resets are processed before the scanner starts a five-second period during which a user is allowed to enter label-programming mode and configure the scanner.

To set the number of host resets:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET IBM NUMBER OF HOST RESETS on page 182. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired number of host resets. The selectable range is 1–15 resets. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001–015).

Examples:

$$ 0 0 1 = 1 \text { reset } $$

$$ 0 0 5 = 5 \text { resets } $$

$$ 0 1 1 = 1 1 \text { resets } $$

1. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned

SET IBM NUMBER OF HOST RESETS

IBM Scale Address

NOTE

This feature applies to IBM Port 17 ONLY.

Specifies IBM scale address for IBM Port 17. The following three addresses are available:

6A
. 6B
6E

To set the IBM Scale Address:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below or from the following page that represents the desired scale address designation.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

IBM SCALE ADDRESS = 6A

IBM Scale Address (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

IBM SCALE ADDRESS = 6B

IBM SCALE ADDRESS = 6E

IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format

This feature enables/disables scanner's ability to set a symbology identifier for a specified label to Code 39 before transmitting that label data to an IBM host. This applies to: Code 128, Code 93 and Codabar for IBM Port 5B; Code 93 and Codabar for IBM Port 9B.

NOTE

When enabled, this feature has no effect on IBM Port 17.

To enable/disable the IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

IBM TRANSMIT LABELS IN CODE 39 FORMAT = DISABLE

IBM TRANSMIT LABELS IN CODE 39 FORMAT = ENABLE

IBM Label Slicing Control

Enables/disables the slicing of IBM-46XX host transmission data into multiple pieces when a label is longer than the length specified by IBM Maximum Label Slice Length on page 187.

Options are:

• Disable Label Slicing — Send data to host in one piece.
• Enable Label Slicing — Slice the host data into multiple pieces when necessary.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

IBM LABEL SLICING CONTROL = DISABLE LABEL SLICING

IBM LABEL SLICING CONTROL = ENABLE LABEL SLICING

IBM Maximum Label Slice Length

Specifies the maximum allowable length of host transmit data in each sliced frame.

NOTE

This setting only applies when IBM Label Slicing Control on page 186 is enabled.

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below, SET IBM MAXIMUM LABEL SLICE LENGTH on page 187. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired slice length. The selectable range is a length from 14 to 246. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (014–100).
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET IBM MAXIMUM LABEL SLICE LENGTH

OEM USB Scanner Device Type

The OEM USB protocol allows for the scanner to be identified as one of two different types of barcode scanners. Depending on what other scanners you may already have connected to a USB POS, you may need to change this setting to enable all scanners to communicate. Options are:

• Table Top Scanner
• Handheld Scanner

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

OEM USB SCANNER DEVICE TYPE = TABLE TOP SCANNER

OEM USB SCANNER DEVICE TYPE = HANDHELD SCANNER

RS-232 Features

RS-232 Baud Rate

NOTE

This feature selects the baud rate required for sending and receiving data.

Single cable interfaces are limited to Baud Rate selections up to 19200. They cannot communicate at Baud Rates of 38400 and up.

To specify the RS-232 Baud Rate:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired baud rate from the bar codes below and on the immediately following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 1200

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 2400

RS-232 Baud Rate (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 4800

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 9600

RS-232 Baud Rate (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 19200

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 38400

RS-232 Baud Rate (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 57600

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 115200

RS-232 Number of Data Bits

Specifies number of data bits required for sending and receiving data.

NOTE

8 data bits with 2 stop bits and parity enabled is not a valid configuration.

NOTE

A setting of 7 data bits and no parity is invalid and will default to 8 data bits and no parity.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired Data Bit setting. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

RS-232 Number of Stop Bits

Specifies number of stop bits required for sending and receiving data.

NOTE

8 data bits with 2 stop bits and parity enabled is not a valid configuration.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired Stop Bit setting. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

RS-232 Parity

NOTE

NOTE

Specifies parity required for sending and receiving data.

8 data bits with 2 stop bits and parity enabled is not a valid configuration.

A setting of no parity and 7 data bits is invalid and will default to 8 data bits and no parity.

Options for this setting are:

• RS-232 PARITY = NONE on page 195
• RS-232 PARITY = EVEN on page 196
• RS-232 PARITY = ODD on page 196

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below or on the following pages representing the desired Parity setting. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes, as well as facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

RS-232 PARITY = NONE

RS-232 Parity (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 PARITY = EVEN

RS-232 PARITY = ODD

RS-232 Hardware Control

Enables/disables use of the RS-232 CTS signal for flow control and/or scan control.

Options are:

• Disable — The scanner transmits to the host regardless of any activity on the CTS line.
• Enable CTS Flow Control — The CTS signal controls transmission of data to the host.
• Enable CTS Scan Control — The CTS line must be active for scanner to read and transmit data. While the CTS line is inactive, scanner remains in a host–disabled state; following a successful label transmission, the CTS signal must transition to inactive and then to active to enable scanning for the next label.
• Enable Magellan SL CTS scan control — Emulates default Magellan SL setting for this feature.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan bar code below or from the following page for the desired setting. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

RS-232 Hardware Control (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = ENABLE CTS FLOW CONTROL

RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = ENABLE CTS SCAN CONTROL

RS-232 Hardware Control (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = ENABLE MGL SL CTS SCAN CONTROL

RS-232 Intercharacter Delay

Specifies delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next in 10-millisecond increments.

To set the RS-232 Intercharacter Delay:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below, SET RS-232 INTERCHARACTER DELAY on page 200. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired delay. The selectable range is 0–100, which is the delay in 10–millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000–100).
   Examples:
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

$$ \begin{array}{l} 0 0 1 = 1 0 \mathrm{ms} \ 0 0 5 = 5 0 \mathrm{ms} \ 0 4 0 = 4 0 0 \mathrm{ms} \ 1 0 0 = 1, 0 0 0 \mathrm{ms} (1 \text { second }) \ \end{array} $$

SET RS-232 INTERCHARACTER DELAY

RS-232 Software Flow Control

Enables/disables RS-232 Flow Control using XON/ XOFF characters.

NOTE

This item will be ignored when the feature, RS-232 NAK Character on page 215, is enabled

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

RS-232 SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL = DISABLE

RS-232 SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL = ENABLE

RS-232 Host Echo

When enabled, this feature passes all data through the scanner to the host as it comes in. This feature is used for applications where "daisy chaining" of RS-232 devices onto the same cable is necessary. If, for example, one of the devices in the chain is a terminal where someone is entering data while another person is simultaneously scanning a bar code requiring transmission to the host, the scanner will wait for the RS-232 channel to be quiet for a specified period of time (set via RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval on page 203). The scanner can be set to observe this delay before sending its data in order to avoid RS-232 transmission conflicts.

NOTE

When RS-232 Host Echo is enabled, the following features are ignored: RS-232 Software Flow Control on page 201 and RS-232 ACK NAK Enable on page 212 as well as all other ACK/NAK related operations, plus processing of RS-232 host commands.

To enable/disable this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval

This setting specifies the time interval of RS-232 channel inactivity which must transpire before the scanner will break the host echo loop to transmit the bar code data that has just been scanned to the host.

- 0 - 100 = Time in 10-millisecond increments.

To set the Host Echo Quiet Interval:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below, SET RS-232 HOST ECHO QUIET INTERVAL on page 203. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired timeout. The selectable range is 0–100, which is the timeout in 10–millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000–100).

Examples:

$$ \begin{array}{l} 0 0 1 = 1 0 \mathrm{ms} \ 0 0 5 = 5 0 \mathrm{ms} \ 0 4 0 = 4 0 0 \mathrm{ms} \ 1 0 0 = 1, 0 0 0 \mathrm{ms} (1 \text { second }) \ \end{array} $$

1. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET RS-232 HOST ECHO QUIET INTERVAL

RS-232 Ignore Host Commands

When set to ignore host commands, the scanner will ignore all host commands except for the minimum set necessary to keep the interface active, transmit labels, and transmit scale information. For normal operation of the interface, disable this feature.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

RS-232 IGNORE HOST COMMANDS =

NORMAL (DO NOT IGNORE HOST COMMANDS)

RS-232 IGNORE HOST COMMANDS = ENABLE

RS-232 TTL

Specifies whether RS-232 interface provides TTL levels on the output pins TxD and RTS.

Choices are:

• Normal RS-232 levels
- TTL levels

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

RS-232 LEVELS = NORMAL RS-232

RS-232 LEVELS = TTL

RS-232 TTL Invert

Enables/disables inversion of TTL.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

RS-232 TTL INVERT = NO INVERT

RS-232 TTL INVERT = INVERT

RS-232 ICL DC1 Character Delay Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to delay a DC1 response for 40 milliseconds.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

RS-232 Team POS ICL Scale

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to enter TEAM POS ICL Scale mode.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

RS-232 TEAM POS ICL SCALE MODE = DISABLE

RS-232 TEAM POS ICL SCALE MODE = ENABLE

RS-232 Beep on ASCII BEL

Enables/disables ability of scanner to beep (sound a good read tone) on receiving an ASCII BEL (07 hex).

To enable/disable this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

RS-232 Beep After Weigh

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to beep after weight data is transmitted to the host. Scale interfaces that support this item are: RS-232 ICL, RS-232 SASI, and RS-232 Single Cable.

To enable/disable the Beep After Weigh feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

BEEP AFTER WEIGH = DISABLE

BEEP AFTER WEIGH = ENABLE

RS-232 Beep on Not on File

Select for the host to beep (or not) when a not-on-file condition is detected by the host. This feature is also applicable to single cable RS-232.

RS-232 BEEP ON NOT ON FILE = DISABLE

RS-232 BEEP ON NOT ON FILE = ENABLE

RS-232 ACK NAK Enable

This enables/disables the ability of the scanner to support the RS-232 ACK/NAK protocol. When configured, the scanner and/or host sends an "ACK" when it receives data properly, and sends "NAK" when the data is in error. Selections for this option are:

• D i s a b l e
- Label Transmission — the scanner expects an ACK/NAK response from the host when a label is sent)
- Host Acknowledgement — Enabled for Host Commands (the scanner will respond with ACK/NAK when the host sends a command)
- Label & Host — Enabled for both Label Transmission & Host Commands

To select the option for RS-232 ACK NAK Enable:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired option from bar codes below and on the following page. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

RS-232 ACK NAK = DISABLE

RS-232 ACK/NAK = LABEL TRANSMISSION

RS-232 ACK NAK Enable (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 ACK/NAK = HOST ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

RS-232 ACK/NAK = LABEL & HOST

RS-232 ACK Character

NOTE

This feature specifies which ASCII character will be used as an ACK character.

DO NOT set this feature to use previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF or host commands as this will conflict with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the feature, RS-232 Number of Data Bits on page 193, is set to 7 data bits.

To specify the RS-232 ACK Character:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 ACK CHARACTER on page 214 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the hex designation for the desired character. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for the desired character. For example, if ASCII "A" were the desired ACK character, you would scan the digits "4", then "1" (the ASCII corresponding hex value).
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits/characters have been scanned.

SET RS-232 ACK CHARACTER

RS-232 NAK Character

NOTE

This feature specifies which ASCII character will be used as a NAK character.

DO NOT set this feature to use previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF or host commands as this will conflict with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the feature, RS-232 Number of Data Bits on page 193, is set to 7 data bits.

To specify the RS-232 NAK Character:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 NAK CHARACTER on page 215 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the hex designation for the desired character. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for the desired character. For example, if ASCII "A" were the desired NAK character, you would scan the digits "4", then "1" (the ASCII corresponding hex value).
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits/characters have been scanned.

SET RS-232 NAK CHARACTER

RS-232 Retry on ACK NAK Timeout

This option specifies the action scanner performs on expiration of the RS-232 ACK NAK Timeout Value on page 217.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

RS-232 RETRY ON ACK NAK TIMEOUT = DISABLE

RS-232 RETRY ON ACK NAK TIMEOUT = ENABLE

RS-232 ACK NAK Timeout Value

This item specifies the time the scanner will wait for an ACK character from the host following a label transmission.

• 0 = Infinite timeout
- 1 - 75 = Timeout in 200-millisecond increments

To set the ACK NAK Timeout Value:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below, SET RS-232 ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE on page 217. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired timeout. A setting of 0 specifies an infinite timeout. The remaining selectable range is 1–75, which is the timeout in 200-millisecond increments. Pad all single digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000–075).
   Examples:

$$ \begin{array}{l} 0 0 0 = \text { Infinite timeout } \ 0 0 1 = 2 0 0 \mathrm{ms} \ 0 0 5 = 1, 0 0 0 \mathrm{ms} (1 \text { second }) \ 0 4 0 = 8, 0 0 0 \mathrm{ms} (8 \text { seconds }) \ 0 7 5 = 1 5, 0 0 0 \mathrm{ms} (1 5 \text { seconds }) \ \end{array} $$

1. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET RS-232 ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE

RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count

This feature sets the number of times for the scanner to retry a label transmission under a retry condition.

To set the RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 ACK NAK RETRY COUNT on page 218 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired number. The selectable range is 0–255 resets. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000–255).

NOTE

A setting of 255 specifies "retry forever."

1. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET RS-232 ACK NAK RETRY COUNT

RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling

This item specifies the method the scanner will use to handle errors detected while waiting to receive the ACK character from the host. Errors include unrecognized host commands and communication errors such as parity or framing errors.

• Ignore Errors (recommended setting)
• Assume ACK (risk of lost label data)
• Assume NAK (risk of duplicate label)

To select the option for RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired option from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

RS-232 ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING = IGNORE ERRORS

RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING = ASSUME ACK

RS-232 ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING = ASSUME NAK

RS-232 Indicate Transmission Failure

Enables/disables an audible error indication upon a transmission failure.

RS-232 INDICATE TRANSMISSION FAILURE = DISABLE

RS-232 INDICATE TRANSMISSION FAILURE = ENABLE

Single Cable RS-232 Options

The RS-232 Single Cable interface shares some configuration options with other RS-232 interfaces. Rather than repeat them in this chapter as Single Cable options, please find them referenced as follows:

• "RS-232 Baud Rate" on page 189
- "RS-232 Number of Data Bits" on page 193
- "RS-232 Number of Stop Bits" on page 194
- "RS-232 Parity" on page 195
- "RS-232 Software Flow Control" on page 201
- "RS-232 Beep After Weigh" on page 210
- "RS-232 Beep on Not on File" on page 211

Single Cable RS-232 Scanner Only Protocol

This sets the type of interface protocol that will be used in Single Cable RS-232.

Options are:

• Scanner/scale RS-232 protocol
• Scanner only RS-232 protocol

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired option. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 PROTOCOL = SCANNER ONLY

Single Cable RS-232 Stale Weight Timeout

Specifies the amount of time (in 10 msec increments) that scale data is presented to the host before being discarded.

To set the Timeout:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

STALE WEIGHT TIMEOUT = 230 msec

Single Cable RS-232 Stale Weight Timeout (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

STALE WEIGHT TIMEOUT = 250 msec

STALE WEIGHT TIMEOUT = 330 msec

Single Cable RS-232 Scale — Transmit Weight Digits

Specifies whether the scale transmits weight data as five digits or as four digits.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired option. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

TRANSMIT WEIGHT DIGITS = FOUR DIGITS

Single Cable Manufacturer Extensions

Enables/Disables manufacturer ^1 extensions to the Single Cable RS-232 interface. These extensions communicate scale calibration information to the host.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

1. The manufacturer of the scanner.

Single Cable Pacesetter Plus Enable

Enables/disables the scanner's ability to send Pacesetter Plus information as trailers to UPC/EAN label data.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SINGLE CABLE PACESETTER PLUS = ENABLE

Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection

Specifies how RTS and CTS are used to control the data flow. RTS is controlled by the Scanner and can be continuously held high/low, or can be asserted during label transmission. The scanner looks at CTS, as the configuration values state, to determine when to send label data.

Choices are:

• Option 0 = RTS is held in low state and CTS is ignored
• Option 1 = RTS is held in high state and CTS is ignored
• Option 2 = Assert RTS and wait for CTS to be asserted
• Option 3 = Assert RTS and ignore CTS
• Option 4 = RTS held low, wait for CTS to be asserted
• Option 5 = RTS held high, wait for CTS to be asserted

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan a bar code below or on the following pages representing the desired option. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes, as well as facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 2

RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 3

Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 4

RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 5

Single Cable RS-232 Use BCC

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use BCC.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE BCC = DISABLE

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE BCC = ENABLE

Single Cable RS-232 Use ACK/NAK

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use ACK/NAK.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Single Cable RS-232 Use STX

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use STX.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE STX = DISABLE

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE STX = ENABLE

Set Single Cable RS-232 STX Character

This feature selects the STX character.

To specify the STX Character:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 STX CHARACTER on page 235 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the decimal designation for the desired character. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding decimal values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning decimal digits for each character. Pad all numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001–127). Thus, to set a single character value of A, bar codes containing the digits '0', '6' and '5' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any decimal value from 001 to 127.
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 STX CHARACTER

Set Single Cable RS-232 ETX Character

Allows selection of the ETX character.

To specify the ETX Character:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 ETX CHARACTER on page 236 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the decimal designation for the desired character. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding decimal values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning decimal digits for each character. Pad all numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001–127). Thus, to set a single character value of A, bar codes containing the digits '0', '6' and '5' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any decimal value from 001 to 127.
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 ETX CHARACTER

Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features

Features listed in this section apply to both the Keyboard Wedge and USB Keyboard interfaces unless otherwise noted.

Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout

This feature specifies the country/language to be supported by the keyboard.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the appropriate country bar code from the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on that and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = USA

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = BELGIUM

Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = BRITAIN

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = DENMARK

Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = FRANCE

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = GERMANY

Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = ITALY

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = NORWAY

Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = SPAIN

Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = SWEDEN

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = SWITZERLAND

Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = HUNGARY

Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = CZECH

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = SLOVAKIA

Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = ROMANIA

KEYBOARD LAYOUT = CROATIA

Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Keyboard Interface Quiet Interval

Specifies amount of time to look for keyboard activity before scanner breaks keyboard connection in order to transmit data to host.

To set the Keyboard Interface Quiet Interval:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below, SET KEYBOARD INTERFACE QUIET INTERVAL on page 246. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired delay. The selectable range is 1–100, which is the interval duration in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001–100).

Examples:

$$ \begin{array}{l} 0 0 1 = 1 0 \mathrm{ms} \ 0 0 5 = 5 0 \mathrm{ms} \ 0 4 0 = 4 0 0 \mathrm{ms} \ 1 0 0 = 1, 0 0 0 \mathrm{ms} (1 \text { second }) \ \end{array} $$

1. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

Keyboard Interface Caps Lock State

Specifies the format in which the scanner sends character data..

Choices are:

• CAPS LOCK OFF — send character data in normal format.
• CAPS LOCK ON — send character data in reverse case.
• SHIFT LOCK ON — send character data in shifted case. This option only applies to Wedge G. For other interface this setting results in a CAPS LOCK OFF functionality.
• CAPS LOCK COMPENSATION MODE — This only applies to the USB Keyboard Interface. For other interfaces, this setting results in a CAPS LOCK OFF functionality.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CAPS LOCK STATE = OFF

CAPS LOCK STATE = CAPS LOCK ON

Keyboard Interface Caps Lock State (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CAPS LOCK STATE = CAPS LOCK COMPENSATION MODE

Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Simulation

Enables/disables ability of scanner to perform host communications normally performed by attached keyboard.

NOTE

This feature does not apply to the USB Keyboard interface.

All PCs check the keyboard status during the power-on Selftest. It is recommended that you enable this function if you are working without a keyboard installation. It simulates keyboard timing and passes the keyboard status to the PC during power-on.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Keyboard Interface — Control Characters

Specifies how the scanner transmits ASCII control characters to the host.

NOTE

This feature does not apply to the USB Keyboard interface.

Choices are:

• Disable Control Characters
• Enable transmission of control characters to host
• Send characters between 00H and 1FH according to a special function-key mapping table. (This is used to send keys that are not in the normal ASCII set; a unique set is provided for each available scancode set. Reference Appendix E, Keyboard Function Key Mappings.)

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your choice from the Control Characters feature bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CONTROL CHARACTERS = DISABLE

Keyboard Interface — Control Characters (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CONTROL CHARACTERS = ENABLE TRANSMISSION OF CTL CHARACTERS

CONTROL CHARACTERS = ENABLE FUNCTION KEY MAPPING

Keyboard Interface — Intercharacter Delay

Sets the delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next, in 10 millisecond increments.

To specify the intercharacter delay:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below, SET KEYBOARD WEDGE INTERCHARACTER DELAY on page 252. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired delay. The selectable range is 0–100, which is the delay in 10–millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000–100).
   Examples:
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

$$ \begin{array}{l} 0 0 1 = 1 0 \mathrm{ms} \ 0 0 5 = 5 0 \mathrm{ms} \ 0 4 0 = 4 0 0 \mathrm{ms} \ 1 0 0 = 1, 0 0 0 \mathrm{ms} (1 \text { second }) \ \end{array} $$

SET KEYBOARD WEDGE INTERCHARACTER DELAY

Symbology Programming

NOTE

If the scanner's interface type must be changed, always be sure that interface configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming session. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items — including symbology programming — to the factory default for that interface type.)

Coupon Control

Used to control the method of processing coupon labels.

Options are:

• Disable coupon decoding
• Enable UPC/EAN coupon decoding
• Enable RSS coupon decoding

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Coupon Control (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

COUPON CONTROL = ENABLE UPC/EAN COUPON DECODING

COUPON CONTROL = ENABLE DATABASE COUPON DECODING

UPC-A Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode UPC-A labels. To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

UPC-A = DISABLE

UPC-A = ENABLE

UPC-A Number System Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-A number system character.

NOTE

This feature MUST be enabled for IBM interfaces for proper function.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

UPC-A NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

UPC-A NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

UPC-A Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-A check character.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

UPC-A CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Expand UPC-A to EAN-13

Enables/disables expansion of UPC-A labels to EAN/JAN-13.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EXPAND UPC-A TO EAN/JAN-13 = DISABLE

EXPAND UPC-A TO EAN/JAN-13 = ENABLE

UPC-A Label ID

NOTE

This feature specifies a UPC-A label ID to be added to bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A LABEL ID on page 259 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET UPC-A LABEL ID

UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID

This feature specifies a UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID on page 260 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET UPC-A 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID

This feature specifies a UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID on page 261 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET UPC-A 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

UPC-A 128 Supplemental Label ID

This feature specifies a UPC-A 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID on page 262 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET UPC-A 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

UPC-A Minimum Reads

Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a UPC-A label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

UPC-A MINIMUM READS = 1

UPC-A MINIMUM READS = 2

UPC-A Minimum Reads (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

UPC-E Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode UPC-E labels. To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

UPC-E = DISABLE

UPC-E = ENABLE

UPC-E Number System Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-E number system character. To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

UPC-E NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

UPC-E NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

UPC-E Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-E check character.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

UPC-E CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

UPC-E CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Expand UPC-E to UPC-A

Enables/disables expansion of UPC-E labels to UPC-A.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Expand UPC-E to EAN-13

Enables/disables expansion of UPC-E labels to EAN/JAN-13.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EXPAND UPC-E TO EAN/JAN-13 = DISABLE

EXPAND UPC-E TO EAN/JAN-13 = ENABLE

UPC-E Label ID

NOTE

This feature specifies a UPC-E label ID to be added to bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E LABEL ID on page 270 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET UPC-E LABEL ID

UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID

This feature specifies a UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID on page 271 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET UPC-E 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID

This feature specifies a UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID on page 272 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET UPC-E 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

UPC-E 128 Supplemental Label ID

This feature specifies a UPC-E 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID on page 273 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET UPC-E 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

UPC-E Minimum Reads

Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a UPC-E label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

UPC-E MINIMUM READS = 1

UPC-E MINIMUM READS = 2

UPC-E Minimum Reads (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-13 Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN/JAN-13 labels.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EAN-13 = DISABLE

EAN-13 = ENABLE

EAN-13 First Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of EAN/JAN-13 first character.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EAN-13 FIRST CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

EAN-13 FIRST CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

EAN-13 Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN-13 check character. To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EAN-13 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

EAN-13 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion Enable

Enables/disables conversion of EAN/JAN-13 labels starting with 978 to Bookland ISBN labels.

NOTE

If any add-on information is present on the label prior to the conversion to ISBN, the add-on data will be discarded. Only the base label will be converted.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EAN 13 Label ID

This feature specifies an EAN 13 label ID to be added to bar code data.

To set this feature:

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN 13 LABEL ID on page 280 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET EAN 13 LABEL ID

EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID

This feature specifies an EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-13 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID on page 281 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET EAN-13 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID

This feature specifies an EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

NOTE

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-13 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID on page 282 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET EAN-13 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

EAN-13 128 Supplemental Label ID

This feature specifies an EAN-13 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-13 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID = DISABLE on page 283 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET EAN-13 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID = DISABLE

EAN-13 Minimum Reads

Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an EAN-13 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EAN-13 Minimum Reads (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-13 MINIMUM READS = 3

EAN-13 MINIMUM READS = 4

Bookland Label ID

NOTE

This feature specifies a Bookland label ID to be added to bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET BOOKLAND LABEL ID on page 286 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET BOOKLAND LABEL ID

EAN-8 Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN/JAN-8 labels.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EAN-8 = DISABLE

EAN-8 = ENABLE

EAN-8 Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN-8 check character. To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EAN-8 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

EAN-8 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13

Enables/disables expansion of EAN/JAN-8 labels to EAN/JAN-13. To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EXPAND EAN/JAN-8 TO EAN/JAN-13 = ENABLE

EAN-8/JAN-8 Guard Insertion

Enables/Disables the ability of the scanner to insert a guard pattern into an otherwise complete EAN-8 segment it has received.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EAN-8/JAN-8 GUARD INSERTION = ENABLE

EAN-8/JAN-8 Guard Substitution

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to substitute a guard pattern for even-parity 6 when an EAN-8/JAN-8 label is presented. To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EAN-8/JAN-8 GUARD SUBSTITUTION = ENABLE

EAN-8/JAN-8 Both Guards Substitution

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to find an EAN/JAN8 guard pattern in cases where the EAN/JAN8 margin makes the guard look like a character.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EAN-8/JAN-8 BOTH GUARDS SUBSTITUTION = DISABLE

EAN-8/JAN-8 BOTH GUARDS SUBSTITUTION = ENABLE

EAN-8 Stitch Exact Label Halves

When enabled, this allows the scanner the ability to stitch exact EAN-8 label haves with no overlapping characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EAN-8 STITCH EXACT LABEL HALVES = DISABLE

EAN-8 STITCH EXACT LABEL HALVES = ENABLE

EAN-8 Stitch Unlike Label Halves

When enabled, this allows the scanner the ability to stitch two EAN-8 label halves together that may contain differing characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EAN-8 STITCH UNLIKE LABEL HALVES = DISABLE

EAN-8 STITCH UNLIKE LABEL HALVES = ENABLE

EAN 8 Label ID

This feature specifies an EAN 8 label ID to be added to bar code data.

To set this feature:

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN 8 LABEL ID on page 295 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET EAN 8 LABEL ID

EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID

This feature specifies an EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-8 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID on page 296 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET EAN-8 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID

This feature specifies an EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-8 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID on page 297 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET EAN-8 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

EAN-8 128 Supplemental Label ID

This feature specifies an EAN-8 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-8 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID on page 298 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET EAN-8 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

EAN-8 Decoding Levels

Decoding levels allow the decoder to be set to perform at one of four selectable levels:

• Very Conservative — Slower scan time, virtually eliminates misreads. The most secure setting.
• Slightly More Aggressive — Faster scanning, more aggressive, yet minimizes misreads.
• Moderately Aggressive — Even faster scanning, even more aggressive.
• Very Aggressive — Fastest scan speed, most aggressive.

Use caution when setting this feature, as the aggressive settings for this feature allow a higher potential for misreads.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

It is important to note that the default for this feature is the "Slightly More Aggressive" setting. For default settings for other features, see Appendix F.

EAN-8 Decoding Levels (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = VERY CONSERVATIVE

EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = SLIGHTLY MORE AGGRESSIVE

EAN-8 Decoding Levels (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = MODERATELY AGGRESSIVE

EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = VERY AGGRESSIVE

EAN-8 Minimum Reads

Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an EAN-8 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EAN-8 Minimum Reads (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length

Specifies the minimum number of characters necessary in an EAN-8/JAN-8 label segment in order for the scanner to accept a label for decoding. Selectable from 5 to 15 characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 5 CHARACTERS

EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 6 CHARACTERS

EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 8 CHARACTERS

EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 9 CHARACTERS

EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 10 CHARACTERS

EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 12 CHARACTERS

EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 13 CHARACTERS

EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 14 CHARACTERS

EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Other UPC/EAN Options

The following pages contain other selectable features for UPC/EAN symbologies:

• Price Weight Check on page 311
• In-Store Label Minimum Reads on page 314
- Enable EAN Two Label on page 316
• EAN Two Label Minimum Reads on page 322
- Addons on page 331

Price Weight Check

Enables/disables calculation and verification of price/weight check digits. Applies to all UPC-A and EAN/JAN-13 labels with eligible ^1 Number System/First Character digits.

Options are:

• D i s a b l e
• 4-digit price/weight
- 5-digit price/weight
• 4-digit European price/weight
• 5-digit European price/weight

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = DISABLE

1. Price Weight Check generally applies to UPC-A labels with a Number System Digit of 2 and EAN/JAN-13 labels with a First Character of 2. There are a total of six flag digits corresponding to the six types. Checking applies depending upon which type is enabled.

Price Weight Check (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 5-DIGIT PRICE/WEIGHT

Price Weight Check (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 4-DIGIT EUROPEAN PRICE/WEIGHT

PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 5-DIGIT EUROPEAN PRICE/WEIGHT

In-Store Label Minimum Reads

Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an In-Store ^1 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

1. Instore labels are defined as UPC-A labels with a number-system character of 2 or 4 as well as EAN-8 and EAN-13 labels with a Flag1 character of 2 or an EAN-13 label starting with the three characters '980'.

In-Store Label Minimum Reads (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

IN-STORE MINIMUM READS = 3

IN-STORE MINIMUM READS = 4

Enable EAN Two Label

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN two-label pairs.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Contact Customer Support for details about advanced programming for this feature.

EAN TWO LABEL = DISABLE

EAN TWO LABEL = ENABLE

EAN Two Label Combined Transmission

Enables/disables the transmitting of an EAN two label pair as one label.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Contact Customer Support for details about advanced programming for this feature.

UPC/EAN Guard Insertion

Enables/Disables the ability of the scanner to insert either a missing leading or trailing guard on an otherwise complete UPC-A/EAN-13 segment it has received.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

UPC/EAN GUARD INSERTION = ENABLE

UPC/EAN Stitch Exact Label Halves

When enabled, this allows the scanner the ability to stitch exact UPC-A / EAN-13 label haves with no overlapping characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

UPC/EAN STITCH EXACT LABEL HALVES = ENABLE

UPC/EAN Stitch Unlike Label Halves

When enabled, this allows the scanner the ability to stitch two UPC-A / EAN-13 label halves together that may contain differing characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

UPC/EAN STITCH UNLIKE LABEL HALVES = DISABLE

UPC/EAN STITCH UNLIKE LABEL HALVES = ENABLE

UPC/EAN Character Reconstruction

Enables/Disables character reconstruction on UPC/EAN labels.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

UPC/EAN CHARACTER RECONSTRUCTION = DISABLE

UPC/EAN CHARACTER RECONSTRUCTION = ENABLE

EAN Two Label Minimum Reads

Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an EAN Two Label bar code must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EAN TWO LABEL MINIMUM READS = 2

EAN Two Label Minimum Reads (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN TWO LABEL MINIMUM READS = 3

EAN TWO LABEL MINIMUM READS = 4

UPC/EAN Correlation

This feature enables/disables character correlation for UPC/EAN. To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

UPC/EAN CORRELATION = ENABLE

UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length

Specifies the minimum number of characters necessary in a UPC/EAN/JAN label segment in order for the scanner to accept a label for decoding. Selectable from 5 to 15 characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 5 CHARACTERS

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 6 CHARACTERS

UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 7 CHARACTERS

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 8 CHARACTERS

UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 9 CHARACTERS

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 10 CHARACTERS

UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 11 CHARACTERS

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 12 CHARACTERS

UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 13 CHARACTERS

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 14 CHARACTERS

UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 15 CHARACTERS

Addons

Add-ons (or supplemental characters) are commonly added to the end of UPC/EAN bar codes. The scanner will read the add-ons if they are enabled and in the field of view. Three add-on types are supported: 2-digit, 5-digit and Code 128 add-ons. Supported options are:

None — This option directs the scanner to ignore add-on portion of a UPC/EAN bar code but still read the main portion of the bar code.

2 Digits — The scanner will optionally read 2-digit add-ons with the UPC/EAN label.

5 Digits — The scanner will optionally read 5-digit add-ons with the UPC/EAN label.

Code 128 Add-on — The scanner will optionally read Code 128 add-ons with the UPC/EAN label.

Contact Customer Support for advanced programming of optional and conditional add-ons.

NOTE

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option on this and the following page. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Addons (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

OPTIONAL 2-DIGIT ADD-ONS = ENABLE

Addons (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

OPTIONAL 5-DIGIT ADD-ONS = DISABLE

OPTIONAL 5-DIGIT ADD-ONS = ENABLE

Addons (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

OPTIONAL CODE 128 ADD-ONS = ENABLE

Addon Timer

When addons have been selected as optional, this feature sets the duration of time that the scanner can unsuccessfully look for an addon before proceeding to read a bar code. Timer duration is specified in 10ms increments.

To set the Addon Timer:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET ADDON TIMER DURATION on page 335 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Addon Timer Duration. The selectable range is 1–10, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001–010).

Examples:

$$ 0 0 1 = 1 0 \mathrm{ms} $$

$$ 0 0 3 = 3 0 \mathrm{ms} $$

$$ 0 0 8 = 8 0 \mathrm{ms} $$

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET ADDON TIMER DURATION

2-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads

Specifies the minimum number of times a 2-digit addon must be read before it is marked as valid and then combined with a base label.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

2-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 2

2-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 3

2-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

5-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads

Specifies the minimum number of times a 5-digit addon must be read before it is marked as valid and then combined with a base label.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

5-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 1

5-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 2

5-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

5-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 4

Code 128 Add-ons Minimum Reads

Specifies the minimum number of times a Code 128 addon must be read before it is marked as valid and then combined with a base label.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODE 128 ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 1

CODE 128 ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 2

Code 128 Add-ons Minimum Reads (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

GTIN Enable

Enables/Disables the ability to convert UPCE, UPCA, EAN8, and EAN13 labels into the GTIN 14-character format.

If add-on information is present on the base label prior to the conversion taking place, the add-on information will be appended to the converted GTIN bar code.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

GTIN Label ID

This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when GTIN conversion is enabled.

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN LABEL ID on page 343 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF (for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET GTIN LABEL ID

GTIN 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID

This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when GTIN conversion is enabled and 2-digit supplemental addon bar code labels are converted.

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID on page 344 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF (for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET GTIN 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

GTIN 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID

This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when GTIN conversion is enabled and 5-digit supplemental addon bar code labels are converted.

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID on page 345 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF (for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET GTIN 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

GTIN Code 128 Supplemental Label ID

This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when GTIN conversion is enabled and Code 128 supplemental addon bar code labels are converted

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN CODE 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID on page 346 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF (for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET GTIN CODE 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

DataBar Omnidirectional Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode DataBar Omnidirectional labels.

NOTE

This value-added feature is a factory-programmed option. Contact your dealer for information about upgrading your system to include this advanced capability.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

DataBar Omnidirectional/EAN-128 Emulation

Enables/disables the ability of DataBar Omnidirectional to be transmitted as EAN-128.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

DataBar Omnidirectional/EAN-128 EMULATION = DISABLE

DataBar Omnidirectional/EAN-128 EMULATION = ENABLE

DataBar Omnidirectional Label ID

This feature specifies an DataBar Omnidirectional label ID to be added to bar code data.

To set this feature:

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET DataBar Omnidirectional LABEL ID on page 349 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET DataBar Omnidirectional LABEL ID

DataBar Omnidirectional Minimum Reads

Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an DataBar Omnidirectional label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

DataBar Omnidirectional MINIMUM READS = 1

DataBar Omnidirectional MINIMUM READS = 2

DataBar Omnidirectional Minimum Reads (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

DataBar Omnidirectional MINIMUM READS = 4

DataBar Expanded Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode DataBar Expanded labels.

NOTE

This value-added feature is a factory-programmed option. Contact your dealer for information about upgrading your system to include this advanced capability.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

DataBar Expanded = DISABLE

DataBar Expanded = ENABLE

DataBar Expanded EAN-128 Emulation

Enables/disables EAN-128 emulation for DataBar Expanded.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

DataBar Expanded/EAN-128 EMULATION = DISABLE

DataBar Expanded/EAN-128 EMULATION = ENABLE

DataBar Expanded Label ID

This feature specifies an DataBar Expanded label ID to be added to bar code data.

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET DataBar Expanded LABEL ID on page 354 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET DataBar Expanded LABEL ID

DataBar Expanded Length Control

This feature specifies either variable-length or fixed-length decoding for DataBar Expanded.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

You must now set the features DataBar Expanded Length 1 on page 356 and DataBar Expanded Length 2 on page 357.

NOTE

DataBar Expanded LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

DataBar Expanded LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

DataBar Expanded Length 1

Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see DataBar Expanded Length Control on page 355). Length includes the barcode's check and data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET DataBar Expanded LENGTH 1 on page 356 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 01 to 74. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-074).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET DataBar Expanded LENGTH 1

DataBar Expanded Length 2

Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see DataBar Expanded Length Control on page 355). Length includes the barcode's check and data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET DataBar Expanded LENGTH 2 on page 357 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 001 to 074. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001–074).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET DataBar Expanded LENGTH 2

DataBar Expanded Minimum Reads

Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an DataBar Expanded label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

DataBar Expanded MINIMUM READS = 1

DataBar Expanded MINIMUM READS = 2

DataBar Expanded Minimum Reads (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

DataBar Expanded MINIMUM READS = 4

Code 39 Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code 39 labels.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODE 39 = DISABLE

CODE 39 = ENABLE

Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of Code 39 start and stop characters.

NOTE

This feature applies only when Code 39 Check Character Calculation on page 362 is enabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

CODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Code 39 Check Character Calculation

Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Code 39 check character. When disabled, any check character in label is treated as a data character.

NOTE

If check calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a misread can occur.

In particular, if you are using variable length stitching, it is important to use check character calculation to prevent misreads.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE

CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE

Code 39 Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of optional Code 39 check character. To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Code 39 Full ASCII

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to translate to Code 39 full ASCII labels.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Code 39 Label ID

NOTE

This feature specifies a Code 39 label ID to be added to bar code data.

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 LABEL ID on page 365 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET CODE 39 LABEL ID

Code 39 Require Quiet Zones

When enabled, this feature requires that quiet zones (margins) be present for Code 39 labels. When disabled, quiet zones are optional.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODE 39 REQUIRE QUIET ZONES = DISABLE

CODE 39 REQUIRE QUIET ZONES = ENABLE

Code 39 Length Control

This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for Code 39.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

You must now set the features Code 39 Length 1 on page 368 and Code 39 Length 2 on page 369.

When using variable length stitching, it is important to enable Code 39 Check Character Calculation on page 362 to prevent misreads.

NOTE

Code 39 Length 1

Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Code 39 Length Control on page 367). Length includes the barcode's check and data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 LENGTH 1 on page 368 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 001 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001–050).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Code 39 Length 2

Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Code 39 Length Control on page 367). Length includes the barcode's check and data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 LENGTH 2 on page 369 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired fixed label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 001 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001–050).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Code 39 Correlation

This feature enables/disables character correlation for Code 39.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODE 39 CORRELATION = DISABLE

CODE 39 CORRELATION = ENABLE

Code 39 Stitching

Enables/disables stitching for Code 39 labels. When parts of a Code 39 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner's software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODE 39 STITCHING = DISABLE

CODE 39 STITCHING = ENABLE

Code 39 Minimum Reads

Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 39 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODE 39 MINIMUM READS = 1

CODE 39 MINIMUM READS = 2

Code 39 Minimum Reads (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CODE 39 MINIMUM READS = 3

CODE 39 MINIMUM READS = 4

Pharmacode 39 Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Italian Pharmacode 39 labels.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

PHARMACODE 39 = DISABLE

PHARMACODE 39 = ENABLE

Pharmacode 39 Start Stop Character Transmission

Enables/ disables transmission of start and stop characters for Pharmacode 39.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

PHARMACODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

PHARMACODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Pharmacode 39 Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of Pharmacode 39 check character. To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

PHARMACODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

PHARMACODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Pharmacode 39 Label ID

This feature specifies a Pharmacode 39 label ID to be added to bar code data.

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET PHARMACODE 39 LABEL ID on page 377 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET PHARMACODE 39 LABEL ID

Code 128 Enable

Enables/disables ^1 the ability of the scanner to decode Code 128 labels.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODE 128 = DISABLE

CODE 128 = ENABLE

1. Exception: The Code 128 symbology is always enabled with regard to scanning/reading the special C128 programming bar codes provided in this manual.

Code 128 Transmit Function Characters

Enables/disables transmission of Code 128 function characters 1, 2, 3, and 4.

NOTE

Disabled is the recommended setting for all interfaces.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODE 128 TRANSMIT FUNCTION CHARACTERS = DISABLE

CODE 128 TRANSMIT FUNCTION CHARACTERS = ENABLE

Convert Code 128 to Code 39

Enables/disables conversion of Code 128 labels to Code 39.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CONVERT CODE 128 TO CODE 39 = DISABLE

CONVERT CODE 128 TO CODE 39 = ENABLE

Code 128 Label ID

NOTE

This feature specifies a Code 128 label ID to be added to bar code data..

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 LABEL ID on page 381 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET CODE 128 LABEL ID

Code 128 Length Control

This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for Code 128.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

You must now set the features Code 128 Length 1 on page 383 and Code 128 Length 2 on page 384.

NOTE

CODE 128 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

CODE 128 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

Code 128 Length 1

Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Code 128 Length Control on page 382). Length includes the barcode's check and data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 LENGTH 1 on page 383 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 001 to 080. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001–080).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Code 128 Length 2

Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Code 128 Length Control on page 382). Length includes the barcode's check and data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 LENGTH 2 on page 384 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 001 to 080. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001–080).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Code 128 Correlation

This feature enables/disables character correlation for Code 128. To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODE 128 CORRELATION = DISABLE

CODE 128 CORRELATION = ENABLE

Code 128 Stitching

Enables/disables stitching for Code 128 labels. When parts of a Code 128 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner's software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODE 128 STITCHING = DISABLE

CODE 128 STITCHING = ENABLE

Code 128 Minimum Reads

Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 128 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Code 128 Minimum Reads (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CODE 128 MINIMUM READS = 3

CODE 128 MINIMUM READS = 4

EAN-128 Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN-128 labels. When disabled, EAN128 labels are transmitted in Code128 data format. When enabled, EAN128 labels are transmitted in EAN128 data format

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

EAN-128 = DISABLE

EAN-128 = ENABLE

EAN-128 Label ID

This feature specifies an EAN-128 label ID to be added to bar code data..

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

NOTE

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-128 LABEL ID on page 390 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET EAN-128 LABEL ID

Interleaved 2 of 5 (1 2 of 5) Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Interleaved 2 of 5 labels.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

I 2 OF 5 = DISABLE

12 OF 5 = ENABLE

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Inter-leaved 2 of 5 check character.

NOTE

If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a misread can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code are treated as data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

12 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE

12 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of an optional Interleaved 2 of 5 check character.

NOTE

This feature applies only when 12 of 5 Check Character Calculation on page 392 is enabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

I 2 of 5 Label ID

This feature specifies an I 2 of 5 label ID to be added to bar code data..

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 of 5 LABEL ID on page 394 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET12 of 5 LABEL ID

12 of 5 Length Control

This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for 12 of 5.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

You must now set the features | 2 of 5 Length 1 on page 396 and | 2 of 5 Length 2 on page 397.

NOTE

I 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

12 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

I 2 of 5 Length 1

Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see 12 of 5 Length Control on page 395). Length includes the barcode's check and data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 of 5 LENGTH 1 on page 396 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 002 to 050, even numbers only. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (002–050).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

12 of 5 Length 2

Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see 1.2 of 5 Length Control on page 395). Length includes the barcode's check and data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET 1 2 of 5 LENGTH 2 on page 397 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 002 to 050, even numbers only. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (002–050).

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET12 of 5 LENGTH 2

I 2 of 5 Correlation

This feature enables/disables character correlation for 12 of 5. To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

12 of 5 Stitching

Enables/disables stitching for 12 of 5 labels. When parts of an 12 of 5 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner's software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

12 of 5 Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY. 12 of 5 Length 1 on page 396 and/or 12 of 5 Length 2 on page 397 must be properly configured for stitching to work.

NOTE

I 2 OF 5 STITCHING = DISABLE

I 2 OF 5 STITCHING = ENABLE

I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads

Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an 12 of 5 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 1

12 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 2

12 of 5 Minimum Reads (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

12 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 3

12 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 4

Standard 2 of 5 (Std 2 of 5) Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Standard 2 of 5 labels.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

STANDARD 2 OF 5 = DISABLE

STANDARD 2 OF 5 = ENABLE

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation

Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check character.

NOTE

If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a misread can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code are treated as data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE

STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check character.

NOTE

This feature applies only when Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation on page 403 is enabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Standard 2 of 5 Label ID

This feature specifies a Standard 2 of 5 label ID to be added to bar code data..

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 of 5 LABEL ID on page 405 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET STANDARD 2 of 5 LABEL ID

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control

This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for Standard 2 of 5.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

You must now set Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 on page 407 and Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 on page 408.

NOTE

STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

Standard 2 of 5 Length 1

Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Standard 2 of 5 Length Control on page 406). Length includes the barcode's check and data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 1 on page 407 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 001 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001–050).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 1

Standard 2 of 5 Length 2

Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Standard 2 of 5 Length Control on page 406). Length includes the barcode's check and data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 on page 408 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 001 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001–050).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2

Standard 2 of 5 Correlation

This feature enables/disables character correlation for Standard 2 of 5.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

STANDARD 2 of 5 CORRELATION = DISABLE

STANDARD 2 of 5 CORRELATION = ENABLE

Standard 2 of 5 Stitching

Enables/disables stitching for Standard 2 of 5 labels. When parts of a Standard 2 of 5 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner's software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Standard 2 of 5 Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY. Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 and/or Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 must be properly configured for stitching to work.

NOTE

Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads

Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Standard 2 of 5 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

STANDARD 2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 1

STANDARD 2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 2

Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

STANDARD 2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 4

Codabar Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Codabar labels.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODABAR = DISABLE

CODABAR = ENABLE

Codabar Start Stop Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of Codabar start and stop characters. To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Codabar Start Stop Character Set

This feature selects the format of transmitted Codabar start/stop characters.

Options are:

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below or from the following page representing the desired option. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes and facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Codabar Start Stop Character Set (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = abcd/tn * e

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = abcd/abcd

Codabar Start Stop Character Match

Enables/disables the requirement that start and stop characters match.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER MATCH = DISABLE

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER MATCH = ENABLE

Codabar Check Character Calculation

Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Codabar check character.

NOTE

If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a misread can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code are treated as data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE

CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE

Codabar Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of an optional Codabar check character.

NOTE

Applies only when Codabar Check Character Calculation on page 418 is enabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Codabar Label ID

This feature specifies a Codabar label ID to e added to bar code data.

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR LABEL ID on page 420 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET CODABAR LABEL ID

Codabar Require Quiet Zones

When enabled, this feature requires that quiet zones (margins) be present for Codabar labels. When disabled, quiet zones are optional.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Codabar Length Control

This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for Codabar.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

You must now set the features Codabar Length 1 on page 423 and Codabar Length 2 on page 424.

NOTE

CODABAR LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

CODABAR LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

Codabar Length 1

Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Codabar Length Control on page 422). Length includes the barcode's check and data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR LENGTH 1 on page 423 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 003 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (003–050).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Codabar Length 2

Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Codabar Length Control on page 422). Length includes the barcode's check and data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 on page 408 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 003 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (003–050).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Codabar Correlation

This feature enables/disables character correlation for Codabar.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODABAR CORRELATION = DISABLE

CODABAR CORRELATION = ENABLE

Codabar Stitching

Enables/disables stitching for Codabar labels. When parts of a Codabar bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner's software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Codabar Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY. Codabar Length 1 on page 423 and/or Codabar Length 2 on page 424 must be properly configured for stitching to work.

NOTE

CODABAR STITCHING = DISABLE

CODABAR STITCHING = ENABLE

Codabar Minimum Reads

Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Codabar label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Codabar Minimum Reads (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CODABAR MINIMUM READS = 3

CODABAR MINIMUM READS = 4

Code 93 Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code 93 labels.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODE 93 = DISABLE

CODE 93 = ENABLE

Code 93 Label ID

This feature specifies a Code 93 label ID to be added to bar code data..

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 LABEL ID on page 430 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET CODE 93 LABEL ID

Code 93 Length Control

This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for Code 93.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

You must now set the features Code 93 Length 1 on page 432 and Code 93 Length 2 on page 433.

NOTE

CODE 93 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

CODE 93 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

Code 93 Length 1

Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Code 93 Length Control on page 431). Length includes the barcode's check and data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 LENGTH 1 on page 432 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 001 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001–050).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Code 93 Length 2

Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Code 93 Length Control on page 431). Length includes the barcode's check and data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 LENGTH 2 on page 433 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 001 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001–050).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Code 93 Correlation

This feature enables/disables character correlation for Code 93.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODE 93 CORRELATION = DISABLE

CODE 93 CORRELATION = ENABLE

Code 93 Stitching

Enables/disables stitching for Code 93 labels. When parts of a Code 93 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner's software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

CODE 93 STITCHING = DISABLE

CODE 93 STITCHING = ENABLE

Code 93 Minimum Reads

Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 93 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

Code 93 Minimum Reads (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CODE 93 MINIMUM READS = 3

CODE 93 MINIMUM READS = 4

MSI/Plessey Enable

Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode MSI/Plessey labels.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

MSI/PLESSEY = DISABLE

MSI/PLESSEY = ENABLE

MSI/Plessey Check Character Calculation

Enables/disables calculation and verification of optional MSI/Plessey check characters.

NOTE

If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a misread can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code are treated as data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE

MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE

MSI/Plessey Number of Check Characters

Specifies number of MSI/Plessey check characters to be calculated and verified.

Check characters are always modulus 10.

NOTE

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired number of MSI/Plessey check characters to be calculated and verified. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

MSI/PLESSEY NUMBER OF CHECK CHARACTERS = 1

MSI/PLESSEY NUMBER OF CHECK CHARACTERS = 2

MSI/Plessey Check Character Transmission

Enables/disables transmission of optional MSI/Plessey check characters.

NOTE

This feature applies only when MSI/Plessey Check Character Calculation on page 439 is enabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

MSI/Plessey Label ID

This feature specifies an MSI/Plessey label ID to be added to bar code data.

NOTE

The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY LABEL ID on page 442 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set on page 1 and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits '4', '1', '4', and '2' must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET MSI/PLESSEY LABEL ID

MSI/Plessey Length Control

This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for MSI/Plessey.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

NOTE

You must now set the features MSI/Plessey Length 1 on page 444 and MSI/Plessey Length 2 on page 445.

MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

MSI/Plessey Length 1

Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see MSI/Plessey Length Control on page 443). Length includes the barcode's check and data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH 1 on page 444 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 004 to 016. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (004–016).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

SET MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH 1

MSI/Plessey Length 2

Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see Code 93 Length Control on page 431). Length includes the barcode's check and data characters.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 LENGTH 2 on page 433 below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 004 to 016. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (004–016).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

MSI/Plessey Correlation

This feature enables/disables character correlation for MSI/Plessey. To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

MSI/PLESSEY CORRELATION = DISABLE

MSI/PLESSEY CORRELATION = ENABLE

MSI/Plessey Stitching

Enables/disables stitching for MSI/Plessey labels. When parts of an MSI/Plessey bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner's software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

NOTE

MSI/Plessey Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY. MSI/Plessey Length 1 on page 444 and/or MSI/Plessey Length 2 on page 445 must be properly configured for stitching to work.

MSI/PLESSEY STITCHING = DISABLE

MSI/PLESSEY STITCHING = ENABLE

MSI/Plessey Minimum Reads

Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an MSI/Plessey label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.

To set this feature:

1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.

MSI/PLESSEY MINIMUM READS = 1

MSI/PLESSEY MINIMUM READS = 2

MSI/Plessey Minimum Reads (continued)

Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

MSI/PLESSEY MINIMUM READS = 4

NOTES

Appendix A

LED/Beeper Indications & Controls

Figure 53 shows the operator's controls and indicators. The descriptions following identify the use or function of each component.

Figure 53. Scanner and Scale Controls

Controls and Indicators

The control panel consists of a green LED indicator, a Volume/Tone push button and a Scale Zero push button/LED indicator as described in the following pages. The unit also includes a beeper which can be configured to sound indications of scanning, weighing, and deactivation activities.

NOTE

Since beeper indications are configurable, your unit may not be programmed to sound all the indications listed. For more information, see Chapter 6, Programming in this manual.

LED and Beeper Indications

Scanner and Scale LEDs

The Scanner LED indicates scanner status, and the Scale LED (which is in combination with the Scale push button) is primarily used to show scale status (see Table 4).

Table 4. Scanner and Scale LED Indications

LED INDICATION	DURATION COMMENT
Scale at Zero^a	Scale (Yellow) LED on steady	The scale is at rest and reads zero weight. The scale is ready to weigh.
Scanner Active ^a (Normal Mode)	Scanner (Green) LED on steady and dim	The scanner is ready for operation. Scanning is immediately available.
Good Read Indication ^a	Scanner (Green) LED - bright flash	Indicates a bar code has been read and decoded.
Program Mode Indication	Scanner (Green) LED - Continuous flashing	Indicates the scanner is in Label Programming Mode. Cycle power to exit Programming Mode.
Sleep Mode Indication	Scanner (Green) LED flashes slowly	The scanner motor and/or laser have automatically switched off and the unit has entered Sleep Mode due to extended inactivity.
Host Dis-abled	Scanner (Green) LED 1-second off, 1/10-second on	Host has disabled scanning.
Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Warning (Error Mode)	Audible low tone 1 second. Alternating Scanner/Scale (Green/Yellow) LEDs flash continuously.	Serves notice that a fatal FRU failure has been detected. Consult "Error Codes" on page 69 for more details. If a low tone is heard, but continuous flashing is not observed, the scanner can still function in a limited capacity. Call systems support for service in either case.
FRU Indication	Scanner (Green) LED flashes a coded sequence in concert with the speaker.	Occurs ONLY upon Volume/Tone button push following a FRU warning. Enables service technicians to identify FRU failures.

a. Certain functions of the Green and Yellow LEDs are selectable to be enabled or disabled. Your scanner may not be programmed to display all indications.

Volume/Tone Push Button

The Volume/Tone Push Button also performs multiple functions depending upon the duration of time it is pressed:

NOTE

The Volume/Tone Push Button must be configured to enable standard functions, or the features described will not apply. Reference Chapter 6, Scanner Button Options for programming details.

Volume changes made using the Volume/Tone Push Button are lost when the scanner is powered-down and are reset to the factory default setting. If you wish to permanently change the volume, use the special programming labels in Chapter 6, Good Read Beep Volume.

PRESS DURATION	FUNCTION COMMENT
Momentary (when scanner is asleep)	Wakes scanner from Sleep Mode	Alternatively, the scanner can be awakened by:- Moving an object through the scan zone.- A weight change on the scale.- Scanning with an attached auxiliary scanner.
Momentary (when scanner is awake)	Increments volume	Press the push button momentarily to increase speaker volume. When the loudest volume is reached, a repeated press of the push button cycles volume back to the lowest setting, then volume increases on subsequent press(es). Four volume levels are available.
Hold, then release when the beeper sounds	Increments tone	Press the push button for approximately 2 seconds, then release. Each time this is done, the beeper will sound at one of three tones. Stop when the desired tone (high, medium or low) is sounded.
4 Seconds	Scanner Diagnostics Modea	This mode allows system support personnel to troubleshoot problems with the scanner. Upon entering Scanner Diagnostic Mode, view the 7-segment display to view Interface Type, Bootloader Version Number, Application Version Number and Configuration File Number. This mode is used to determine if a scanner can read bar codes. Press the button for eight seconds or cycle power to exit Scanner Diagnostics Mode and reset the scanner.
8 Seconds	Resets Scannerb	Only system support personnel should perform a reset.

a. Diagnostics Mode is meant for use by trained systems support personnel. Users should not need to initiate this function under normal circumstances.
b. Users should not perform scanner resets except under the direction of trained systems support personnel.

Scale Zero Push Button

The Scale Zero Push Button is used for multiple functions as listed.

The Scale Zero Push Button has no function in a "scanner only" model. The button must be configured to enable standard functions, or Scale Diagnostics will not be an available feature. Reference Chapter 6, Scanner Button Options for programming details.

PRESS DURATION	FUNCTION COMMENT
Momentary Zero Scale		When programmed to do so, the yellow LED should be lit when no weight is on the scale, indicating scale at zero. If it is not, press the switch to zero the scale.
4 Seconds	Scale Diagnostics Modea	This mode allows system support personnel to troubleshoot problems with the scale. Momentarily press the Scale Zero Push Button or cycle power to exit Scale Diagnostics Mode.

a. Diagnostics Mode is meant for use by trained systems support personnel. Users should not need to initiate this function under normal circumstances.

Calibration Switch

This switch initiates the scale's calibration routine. A certified weight set is needed to perform the scale calibration steps detailed in Chapter 5, Calibration. This switch is not included in scanners without scale modules.

Calibration Switch Seal

This seal allows you to secure the Calibration Switch access cover and restrict access to the Calibration Switch. If the calibration seal is broken or missing, you may be prohibited from operating the scale without recertification. Check local and state requirements for specific restrictions.

Calibration Switch

A cover restricts access to the Calibration Switch to help guard against unauthorized tampering when sealed. The Calibration Switch is located just beneath the Spider in the location indicated in Figure 54.

LEGAL NOTE

There are regulations that must be followed in order to ensure compliance when operating a weighing device such as the scanner/scale. Failure to observe and comply with these regulations could result in legal action.

Figure 54. Calibration Switch

NOTES

Appendix B Cable Information

Introduction

The following pages contain pinout information, enabling you to create standard interface cables for use in interconnecting the scanner, scale, external handheld scanner, and POS terminal.

General Specifications

Wire Requirements

• Cable length should not exceed 15 feet.
• Wire gauge = Standard for RJ-45 connectors (28-26 AWG).
• If run exceeds 15 feet, we recommend 26 AWG wire size.

RS-232 Cable Pinout

Scanner

Connector Hardware

RJ45, 10 Position

Cable Pinout

PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
1	N/C	No Connection
2	C	T Clear To Send (input) n
3	N/C	No Connection
4	R T	Request To Send(output) u t
5	R x	Receive Data (Input) n
6	T x	Transmit Data (output) u t
7	N/C	No Connection
8	N/C	No Connection
9	GND	Signal Ground
10 N/C		No Connection

Scale

Connector Hardware

RJ45, 10 Position

Cable Pinout

PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
1 +5V pullup	+5V pullup
2 C T Clear To Send (input) I
3 N/C	No Connection
4 R T Request To Send (output) U
5 R x Receive Data (Input) I
6 T x Transmit Data (output) U
7 N/C	No Connection
8 N/C	No Connection
9 Gnd	Signal Ground
10 N/C	No Connection

IBM Cable Pinout

Scanner and Scale

Connector Hardware

RJ45, 10 Position

Cable Pinout

PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
1	N/C	No Connection
2	N/C	No Connection
3	N/C	No Connection
4	L	Linle B N
5	N/C	No Connection
6	L	Linle A N
7	N/C	No Connection
8	N/C	No Connection
9	GND	Signal Ground
10 N/C		No Connection

OEM USB Cable Pinout

Scanner and Scale

Connector Hardware

RJ45, 10 Position

Cable Pinout

PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
1	N/C	No Connection
2	N/C	No Connection
3	V	BUSB VBUS U S
4	U S	USB D- B D -
5	N/C	No Connection
6	U S	USB D+ B D +
7	N/C	No Connection
8	N/C	No Connection
9	GND	Signal Ground
10 N/C		No Connection

Auxiliary Port

External Handheld Input

Connector Hardware

RJ45, 10 Position

Cable Pinout

PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
1	+ 5	+5V pullup p u
2	C	Clear To Send (input) i n
3	N/C	No Connection - Reserved
4	R T	Request To Send (output) u
5	R x	Receive Data (Input) i n
6	T x	TransmitData (output) u
7	N/C	No Connection
8 +5V out (500mA max)		+5V out
9	GND	Signal Ground
10 N/C		No Connection

Power Cable

Connector Hardware

3 pin Molex

Cable Pinout

PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
1 EARTH GND			Earth Ground
2	S	I	Signal Ground	A L
3	+	1	+12V in 2	V I

Remote Display

Connector Hardware

4 pin SDL

Cable Pinout

PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION			ON
1	+	1	+12V out	V	0
2	L	I	N LINE A Display	-	A
3	L	I	N LINE B Display	-	B
4	GND		Ground

U

D

D

EAS Comm Port (Sensormatic® systems ONLY)

EAS Deactivator Control Box Connection

Connector Hardware

RJ4

Cable Pinout

PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
1	GND	GND
2	+ 5	+5V Out V 0 u
3	External Read Indica-tor	When configured, signifies good read
4	A u	Intended to drive an external ampli-fier that drives and external o speaker.

NOTES

Appendix C Keypad

Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad.

Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

0

1

Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad.

Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

2

3

Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad.

Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

4

5

Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad.

Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

6

7

Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad.

Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

8

9

Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad.

Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

A

B

Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad.

Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

C

D

Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad.

Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You'll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

E

F

Appendix D

Host Commands

Accepting Commands from an RS-232 Scanner Host

The scanner responds to the following RS-232 commands:

COMMAND ASCII HEX COMMENT

Enable Scanner	E	0	x	4	5
Disable Scanner	D	0	x	4	4
Reset Scanner	R	0	x	5	2
Not On File Indication	F 0x46 Long series of beeps
Beep Good Read Tone	B 0x42 Beeps if Good Read Beep is enabled
Force Good Read Tone		0x01 Beeps regardless of beep setting
Bel		0x07 Force Good Read Tone
Identification request	i	0	x	6	Returns long responsea
Health request	h	0	x	6	Returns long responsea
Status request	s	0	x	7	Returns long responsea

a. Call Tech Support for information.

If one of the above commands is received, the scanner will perform the steps indicated for the command. Host commands for other interfaces is also available. Contact Tech Support for more details.

NOTES

Appendix E

Keyboard Function Key Mappings

Keyboard Model Cross Reference

Table summarizes the keyboard models, their defined protocol, scancode set, and some unique features. The remaining tables in this chapter provide the function key maps associated with each of the scancode sets.

Table 5. Keyboard Model Cross Reference

Model Type I/F ID		Transmission Protocol	Scancode Set	Function Key Map Support	Use Country Mode
PC/XT Foreign ALT Mode	Wedge A	PC/XT	Scan Set 1 No	No
AT;PS/2 25-286;PS/2 30-286;PS/2 50, 50Z;PS/2 60,70,80,90,95 Foreign ALT Mode	Wedge B	AT/PS2	Scan Set 2 No	No
PS/2 25 and 30 Foreign ALT Mode	Wedge C	AT/PS2	Scan Set 1 No	No
PC/XT U.S. Mode	Wedge D	PC/XT	Scan Set 1 Yes	No
AT;PS/2 25-286;PS/2 30-286;PS/2 50, 50Z;PS/2 60,70,80,90,95 U.S. Mode + specific country support	Wedge E	AT/PS2	Scan Set 2 Yes	Yes
PS/2 25 and 30 U.S. Mode	Wedge F	AT/PS2	Scan Set 1 Yes	No
IBM 3xxx Terminals (122-key keyboard)	Wedge G	AT/PS2	Scan Set 3 Yes	No
IBM 3xxx Terminals (102-key keyboard)	Wedge H	AT/PS2	Scan Set 3 Yes	No
PS55 5530T with JAPANESE DOS (TDOS)	Wedge I	AT/PS2	Japanese DOS	Yes No
NEC 9801	Wedge J	NEC 9801	NEC 9801 Yes	No

Table 6. Scanset 1 Function Key Map

ASCII (hex)	ASCII code	Key Scancode
00 NUL		ALT right Make E0h 38h
01 SOH		ALT right Break E0h B8h
02 STX		ALT left Make 38h
03 ETX		ALT left Break B8h
04 EOT		CTRL left Make 1Dh
05 ENQ		CTRL left Break 9Dh
06 ACK		CTRL right Make E0h 1Dh
07 BEL		CTRL right Break E0h 9Dh
08	BS	BS	0Eh
09	HT	TAB right	0Fh
0A	LF	RIGHT arrow (inner keypad)	4Dh + E0
0B	VT	TAB left	0Fh + S
0C	FF	Enter (inner keypad)	1Ch + E0
0D	CR	CR	1Ch
0E	SO	INSERT (inner keypad)	52h + E0
0F	SI	PAGE UP (inner keypad)	49h + E0
10 DLE		PAGE DOWN (inner keypad)	51h + E0
11 DC1		HOME (inner keypad)	47h + E0
12 DC2		LEFT arrow (inner keypad)	4Bh + E0
13 DC3		DOWN arrow (inner keypad)	50h + E0
14 DC4		UP arrow (inner keypad)	48h + E0

Table 7. Scanset 2 Function Key Map

ASCII (hex)	ASCII code	Key Scancode
00 NUL		ALT right Make E0h 11h
01 SOH		ALT right Break E0h F0h 11h
02 STX		ALT left Make 11h
03 ETX		ALT left Break F0h 11h
04 EOT		CTRL left Make 14h
05 ENQ		CTRL left Break F0h 14h
06 ACK		CTRL right Make E0h 14h
07 BEL		CTRL right Break E0h F0h 14h
08 BS		BS 66h
09 HT		TAB right	0Dh
0A LF		RIGHT arrow (inner keypad)	74h + E0
0B VT		TAB left	0Dh + S
0C	FF	Enter (right keypad) 5Ah + E0
0D	CR	CR 5Ah
0E	SO	INSERT (inner keypad)	70h + E0
0F	SI	PAGE UP (inner keypad)	7Dh + E0
10 DLE		PAGE DOWN (inner keypad)	7Ah + E0
11 DC1		HOME (inner keypad)	6Ch + E0
12 DC2		LEFT arrow (inner keypad)	6Bh + E0
13 DC3		DOWN arrow (inner keypad)	72h + E0
14 DC4		UP arrow (inner keypad)	75h + E0
15 NAK		F6	0Bh
16	SYN	F1	05h
17 ETB		F2	06h
18 CAN		F3	04h
19	EM	F4	0Ch
1A SUB		F5	03h
1B ESC		ESC	76h
1C	FS	F7	83h
1D	GS	F8	0Ah
1E RS		F9	01h
1F US		F10	09h

Table 8. Scanset 3, 102-Key Function Key Map

ASCII (hex)	ASCII code	Key Scancode
00 NUL		ALT right Make 39h
01 SOH		ALT right Break F0h 39h
02 STX		ALT left Make 19h
03 ETX		ALT left Break F0h 19h
04 EOT		CTRL left Make 11h
05 ENQ		CTRL left Break F0h 11h
06 ACK		CTRL right Make 58h
07 BEL		CTRL right Break F0h 58h
08 BS		BS	66h
09 HT		TAB right	0Dh
0A LF		RIGHT arrow (inner keypad)	6Ah
0B VT		TAB left	0Dh + S
0C	FF	Enter (inner keypad)	79h
0D	CR	CR	5Ah
0E	SO	INSERT (inner keypad)	67h
0F	SI	PAGE UP (inner keypad)	6Fh
10 DLE		PAGE DOWN (inner keypad)	6Dh
11 DC1		HOME (inner keypad)	6Eh
12 DC2		LEFT arrow (inner keypad)	61h
13 DC3		DOWN arrow (inner keypad)	60h
14 DC4		UP arrow (inner keypad)	63h
15 NAK		F6	2Fh
16	SYN	F1	07h
17 ETB		F2	0Fh
18 CAN		F3	17h
19	EM	F4	1Fh
1A SUB		F5	27h
1B ESC		ESC	08h
1C	FS	F7	37h
1D	GS	F8	3Fh
1E RS		F9	47h
1F US		F10	4Fh

Table 9. Scanset 3 122-Key Function Key Map

ASCII (hex)	ASCII code	Key Scancode
00 NUL		ALT Right Make 39h
01 SOH		ALT Right Break F0h 39h
02 STX		ALT left Make 19h
03 ETX		ALT left Break F0h 19h
04 EOT		CTRL left (RESET) Make only 11h
05 ENQ		CTRL left (RESET) Make/Break	11h F0h 11h
06 ACK		ONLINE Enter Make only 58h
07 BEL		ONLINE Enter Make/Break 58h	F0h 58h
08	BS	BS	66h
09	HT	TAB right	0Dh
0A	LF	RIGHT arrow (inner keypad)	6Ah
0B	VT	TAB left	0Dh + S
0C	FF	CR (FIELD EXIT) Make only	5Ah F0h 5Ah
0D	CR	CR (FIELD EXIT) Make/Break	5Ah
0E	SO	INSERT (inner keypad) 65h
0F	SI	FIELD +	79h
10 DLE		FIELD -	7Ch
11 DC1		HOME (inner keypad)	62h
12 DC2		LEFT arrow (inner keypad)	61h
13 DC3		DOWN arrow (inner keypad)	60h
14 DC4		UP arrow (inner keypad)	63h
15 NAK		F6	2Fh
16	SYN	F1	07h
17 ETB		F2	0Fh
18 CAN		F3	17h
19	EM	F4	1Fh
1A SUB		F5	27h
1B	ESC	ESC	08h
1C	FS	F7	37h
1D	GS	F8	3Fh
1E	RS	F9	47h
1F	US	F10	4Fh

Table 10. Japanese DOS Function Key Map

ASCII value	ASCII code Key	Scancode
00h NUL		ALT right Make	31h
01h SOH		ALT right Break	B1h
02h STX		ALT left Make	31h
03h ETX		ALT left Break	B1h
04h EOT		CTRL left Make	41h
05h ENQ		CTRL left Break	C1h
06h ACK		CTRL right Make	41h
07h BEL		CTRL right Break	C1h
08h BS		BS	3Eh
09h HT		TAB right	3Ch
0Ah LF		RIGHT arrow (inner key-pad)	4Dh
0Bh VT		TAB left	3Ch + S
0Ch FF		Enter (right keypad)	60h
0Dh CR		CR	3Bh
0Eh SO		INSERT (inner keypad)	52h
0Fh SI		PAGE UP (inner keypad)	49h
10h DLE		PAGE DOWN (inner keypad)	51h
11h DC1		HOME (inner keypad)	4Ch
12h DC2		LEFT arrow (inner keypad)	4Bh
13h DC3		DOWN arrow (inner keypad)	4Ah
14h DC4		UP arrow (inner keypad)	4Eh
15h NAK		F6	6Dh
16h SYN		F1	68h
17h ETB		F2	69h
18h CAN		F3	6Ah
19h EM		F4	6Bh
1Ah SUB		F5	6Ch
1Bh ESC		ESC	3Dh
1Ch FS		F7	6Eh
1Dh GS		F8	6Fh
1Eh RS		F9	70h
1Fh US		F10	71h

Table 11. NEC 9801-Key Function Key Map

ASCII value	ASCII code Key	Scancode
00h NUL		unused	n/a
01h SOH		CR	1Ch
02h STX		CAPS LOCK ON (make)	71h
03h ETX		CAPS LOCK OFF (break)	F1h
04h EOT		CTRL left Make	74h
05h ENQ		CTRL left Break	F4h
06h ACK		CTRL-C	60h
07h BEL		n/a	n/a
08h BS		BS	0Eh
09h HT		TAB right	0Fh
0Ah LF		RIGHT arrow (inner key-pad)	3Ch
0Bh VT		TAB left	0Fh + S
0Ch FF		DELETE	39h
0Dh CR		CR	1Ch
0Eh SO		INSERT (inner keypad)	38h
0Fh SI		KATAKANA LOCK ON (Make)	72h
10h DLE		KATAKANA LOCK OFF (Break)	F2h
11h DC1		HOME (inner keypad)	3Eh
12h DC2		LEFT arrow (inner keypad)	3Bh
13h DC3		DOWN arrow (inner keypad)	3Dh
14h DC4		UP arrow (inner keypad)	3Ah
15h NAK		F6	67h
16h SYN		F1	62h
17h ETB		F2	63h
18h CAN		F3	64h
19h EM		F4	65h
1Ah SUB		F5	66h
1Bh ESC		ESC	00h
1Ch FS		F7	68h
1Dh GS		F8	69h
1Eh RS		F9	6Ah
1Fh US		F10	6Bh

Table 12. USB Keyboard Function Key Usage Map

ASCII Key	Value Usage	Name
00 NUL		ALT right Make
01 SOH		ALT right Break
02 STX		F11
03 ETX		F12
04 EOT		GUI right Make
05 ENQ		GUI right Break
06 ACK		CTRL right Make
07 BEL		CTRL right Break
08 BS		BS
09 HT		TAB right
0A LF		RIGHT arrow (inner keypad)
0B VT		TAB left
0C FF		Enter (right keypad)
0D CR		CR
0E SO		INSERT (inner keypad)
0F SI		PAGE UP (inner keypad)
10 DLE		PAGE DOWN (inner keypad)
11 DC1		HOME (inner keypad)
12 DC2		LEFT arrow (inner keypad)
13 DC3		DOWN arrow (inner keypad)
14 DC4		UP arrow (inner keypad)
15 NAK		F6
16 SYN		F1
17 ETB		F2
18 CAN		F3
19 EM		F4
1A SUB		F5
1B ESC		ESC
1C FS		F7
1D GS		F8
1E RS		F9
1F US		F10

NOTES

Appendix F

Factory Defaults

The following table provides a listing of the most common factory settings for the interfaces shown.

Table 13. Factory Default Settings

	RS-232	Wincor-Nixdorf	RS-232 Single Cable	Keybd. Wedge	IBM	OEM USB
Scanner Button Options on page 106	Enable Std Functions	Enable Std Functions	Enable Std Functions	Enable Std Functions	Enable Std Functions	Enable Std Functions
Double Read Time-out on page 108	400ms 400ms 400ms 400ms 400ms
Laser Timeout on page 110	5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min.
Motor Timeout on page 112	10 min. 10 min. 10 min. 10 min. 10 min.
Label Gone Time-out on page 115	160 msec 160 msec 160 msec 160 msec 160 msec				160 msec
Auxiliary Port Mode on page 118	Disable	Enable Handheld	Disable Disable		Disable
Auxiliary Port Baud Rate on page 120	19200 19200 19200 19200 19200
Laser Failure Mode on page 124	Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK				Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK Single OK
Productivity Index Reporting (PIR)/ Cashier Training (CT) on page 125	Disable Disable		Disable Disable	Disable
Green LED Idle State on page 126	On dim On	dim On dim	On dim On dim	On dim
Power-up Beep Control on page 127	1 beep 1	beep 1 beep 1	beep 1 beep 1	beep
Good Read Beep Control on page 128	Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable
Good Read Beep Frequency on page 129	Medium Medium Medium Medium Medium
Good Read Beep Length on page 131	80ms 80ms 80ms 80ms 80ms
Good Read Beep Volume on page 132	High High High High High High
Good Read When to Indicate on page 135	After decode	After decode	After decode	After decode	After decode	After decode
Scale Enable on page 137	Enable Enable Enable Enable
Scale Enforced Zero Return on page 138	3 (non-zero for 4 minutes)	3 (non-zero for 4 minutes)	Disable		3 (non-zero for 4 minutes)	3 (non-zero for 4 minutes)
Scale Interface Type on page 141	RS-232 SASI	RS-232 SASI
Scale Calibration Notification on page 143	Disable Disable		Disable Disable
Scale Intercharacter Delay on page 144	No delay No delay
Remote Display — Enable/Disable on page 145	Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable
EAS Active State on page 146	Low Low Low Low Low
EAS Timeout on page 147	20ms 20ms 20ms 20ms 20ms
Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length on page 168	No limit No limit No limit No limit No limit
Number of Host Transmission Buffers on page 169	2 buffers 1 buffer 2 buffers 2 buffers 1 buffer 1 buffer
AIM ID on page 170	Disable Disable Disable
Label ID Control on page 172	Enable as prefix	Enable as prefix	Enable as prefix	Enable as prefix
Global Prefix on page 175	00 (""') 00 (""') 00 (""') 00 (""')
Global Suffix on page 177	OD00 ()	OD00 ()	00 ("" )	OD00 ()
Case Conversion on page 179	No conversion	No conversion	No conversion	No conversion	No conversion	No conversion
IBM Interface Options on page 181			10 (custom options)		Full Host Interface Support	Full Host Interface Support
IBM Number of Host Resets on page 182					6	6
IBM Scale Address on page 183					6E 6E
IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format on page 185					Disable Disable
IBM Label Slicing Control on page 186					Slice when nec.	Slice when nec.
IBM Maximum Label Slice Length on page 187					64 64
OEM USB Scanner Device Type on page 188						Table top scanner
RS-232 Baud Rate on page 189	9600 9600	9600
RS-232 Number of Data Bits on page 193	8 data bits	8 data bits	7 data bits
RS-232 Number of Stop Bits on page 194	1 stop bit 1	stop bit 1 stop bit
RS-232 Parity on page 195	None Odd	Odd
RS-232 Hardware Control on page 197	Disable	Enable CTS flow
RS-232 Intercharacter Delay on page 200	None None
RS-232 Software Flow Control on page 201	Disable Disable Disable
RS-232 Host Echo on page 202	Disable Disable
RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval on page 203	10ms 10ms
RS-232 Ignore Host Commands on page 204	Do not ignore	Do not ignore	Do not ignore	Do not ignore	Do not ignore	Do not ignore
RS-232 TTL on page 205	Normal RS-232	Normal RS-232
RS-232 TTL Invert on page 206	No invert No invert
RS-232 ICL DC1 Character Delay Enable on page 207	Disable Disable
RS-232 Team POS ICL Scale on page 208	Disable Disable
RS-232 Beep on ASCII BEL on page 209	Disable Disable
RS-232 Beep After Weigh on page 210	Disable Disable Disable
RS-232 Beep on Not on File on page 211	Enable Enable Enable
RS-232 ACK NAK Enable on page 212	Disable Disable
RS-232 ACK Character on page 214	ACK ACK
RS-232 NAK Character on page 215	NAK NAK
RS-232 Retry on ACK NAK Timeout on page 216	Enable Enable
RS-232 ACK NAK Timeout Value on page 217	200ms 200ms
RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count on page 218	3 resets 3 resets
RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling on page 219	Ignore errors	Ignore errors
Single Cable RS-232 Scanner Only Protocol on page 223			Scanner-scale
Single Cable RS-232 Stale Weight Timeout on page 224			330 msec
Single Cable RS-232 Scale — Transmit Weight Digits on page 226			Transmit as 4 digits
Single Cable Manufacturer Extensions on page 227			Disable
Single Cable Pace-setter Plus Enable on page 228			Disable
Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTSSelection on page 229			Option 5
Single Cable RS-232 Use BCC on page 232			Disable
Single Cable RS-232 Use ACK/NAK on page 233			Disable
Single Cable RS-232 Use STX on page 234			Enable
Set Single Cable RS-232 STX Character on page 235			S
Set Single Cable RS-232 ETX Character on page 236			Enable
Set Single Cable RS-232 ETX Character on page 236			CR
Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Lay-out on page 237			US
Keyboard Interface Quiet Interval on page 246			100 ms
Keyboard Interface Caps Lock State on page 247			Caps lock OFF
Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Simulation on page 249			Disable
Keyboard Interface — Control Characters on page 250			Disable
Keyboard Interface — Intercharacter Delay on page 252			10 msec
Coupon Control on page 253	Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enableible Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable EnableEnable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable才能是
UPC-A Enable on page 255	Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable只能是
UPC-A Number System Character Transmission on page 256	Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable只能是
UPC-A Check Character Trans-mission on page 257	Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable只能是
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 on page 258	Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable disable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable incentive只能是
UPC-A Label ID on page 259	A	A	A	A
UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID on page 260	A	A	A	A
UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID on page 261	A	A	A	A
UPC-A 128 Supplemental Label ID on page 262	A	A	A	A
UPC-A Minimum Reads on page 263	1	1	1	1	1	1
UPC-E Enable on page 265	Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable
UPC-E Number System Character Transmission on page 266	Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable
UPC-E Check Character Transmission on page 267	Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Enable
Expand UPC-E to UPC-A on page 268	Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 on page 269	Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
UPC-E Label ID on page 270	E	C	E	E
UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID on page 271	E	C	E	E
UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID on page 272	E	C	E	E
UPC-E 128 Sup-plemental Label ID on page 273	E	C	E	E
UPC-E Minimum Reads on page 274	2	2	2	2	2	2
EAN-13 Enable on page 276	Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable
EAN-13 First Character Trans-mission on page 277	Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable
EAN-13 Check Character Trans-mission on page 278	Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable
EAN-13 ISBN Con-version Enable on page 279	Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
EAN 13 Label ID on page 280	F	A	F	F
EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID on page 281	F	A	F	F
EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID on page 282	F	A	F	F
EAN-13 Minimum Reads on page 284	1	1	1	1	1	1
EAN-13 128 Supplemental Label ID on page 283	F	A	F	F
Bookland Label ID on page 286	I	A	I		I
EAN-8 Enable on page 287	Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable
EAN-8 Check Character Transmission on page 288	Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable
Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13 on page 289	Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
EAN-8/JAN-8 Guard Insertion on page 290	Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
EAN-8/JAN-8 Guard Substitution on page 291	Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable
EAN-8/JAN-8 Both Guards Substitution on page 292	Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
EAN-8 Stitch Exact Label Halves on page 293	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
EAN-8 Stitch Unlike Label Halves on page 294	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
EAN 8 Label ID on page 295	FF B FF	FF
EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID on page 296	FF B FF	FF
EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID on page 297	FF B FF	FF
EAN-8 128 Sup-plemental Label ID on page 298	FF B FF	FF
EAN-8 Decoding Levels on page 299	1 (Very Conservative)	1 (Very Conservative)	1 (Very Conservative)	1 (Very Conservative)	1 (Very Conservative)	1 (Very Conservative)
EAN-8 Minimum Reads on page 302	2	1	2	2	2	2
EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length on page 304	8	8	8	8	8	8
Price Weight Check on page 311	Disable Disable	Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
In-Store Label Minimum Reads on page 314	2	2	2	2	2	2
Enable EAN Two Label on page 316	Disable Disable	Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
EAN Two Label Combined Transmission on page 317	Disable Disable	Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
UPC/EAN Guard Insertion on page 318	Disable Disable	Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
UPC/EAN Stitch Exact Label Halves on page 319	Disable Disable	Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
UPC/EAN Stitch Unlike Label Halves on page 320	Disable Disable	Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
UPC/EAN Character Reconstruction on page 321	Disable Disable	Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
EAN Two Label Minimum Reads on page 322	1	1	1	1	1	1
Addon Timer on page 335	70mS 70mS	70mS 70mS	70mS 70mS	70mS 70mS
UPC/EAN Correlation on page 324	Disable	Disable	Disable	Disable
2-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads on page 336	2	2	2	2	2	2
5-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads on page 338	1	1	1	1	1	1
Code 128 Add-ons Minimum Reads on page 340	1	1	1	1	1	1
UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length on page 325	5	5	5	5	5	5
GTIN Enable on page 342	Disable	Disable	Disable	Disable
GTIN Label ID on page 343	G	G	G	G
GTIN 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID on page 344	G2 G2 G2 G2
GTIN 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID on page 345	G5 G5 G5 G5
GTIN Code 128 Supplemental Label ID on page 346	G8 G8 G8 G8
DataBar Omnidi-rectional Enable on page 347	Disable	Disable	Disable	Disable
DataBar Omnidi-rectional/EAN-128 Emulation on page 348	Disable	Disable	Disable	Disable
DataBar Omnidi-rectional Label ID on page 349	R4 E R4	R4
DataBar Omnidi-rectional Mini-mum Reads on page 350	1	1	1	1	1	1
DataBar Expanded Enable on page 352	Disable	Disable	Disable	Disable
DataBar Expanded EAN-128 Emula-tion on page 353	Disable	Disable	Disable	Disable
DataBar Expanded Label ID on page 354	RX E RX	RX
DataBar Expanded Length Control on page 355	Variable	Variable	Variable	Variable
DataBar Expanded Length 1 on page 356	1	1	1	1	1	1
DataBar Expanded Length 2 on page 357	74 74 74	74 74 74
DataBar Expanded Minimum Reads on page 358	1	1	1	1	1	1
Code 39 Enable on page 360	Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable
Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission on page 361	Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
Code 39 Check Character Calculation on page 362	Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
Code 39 Check Character Transmission on page 363	Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable
Code 39 Full ASCII on page 364	Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
Code 39 Label ID on page 365	*	M	B	1	*
Code 39 Require Quiet Zones on page 366	Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable
Code 39 Length Control on page 367	Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable
Code 39 Length 1 on page 368	2	2	2	2	2	2
Code 39 Length 2 on page 369	50 50 50	50 50 50
Code 39 Correlation on page 370	Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable EnableEnable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enableible Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable只能是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,不能是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,三者有效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是失效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是無,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是有效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以 是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以 是有效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以是无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有限无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以 有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效, 可能是无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效, 司能是无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效,可以有无效, 司能是无效(以有效表示为有效表示为准),可以是无效(以有效表示为准),可以是无效(以有效表示为准),可以是无效(以有效表示为准),可以是无效(以有效表示为准),可以是无效(以有效表示为准),可以是无效(以有效表示为准),可以是无效(以有效表示为准),可以是无效(以有效表示为准),可以是无效(以有效表示为准),可以是无效(以有效表示为准),可以是无效(以有效表示为准),可以是无效(以有限表示为准),可以是无效(以有限表示为准),可以是无效(以有限表示为准),可以是无效(以有限表示为准),可以是无效(以有限表示为准),可以是无效(以有限表示为准),可以是无效(以有限表示为准),可以是无效(以有限表示为准),可以是无效(以有限表示为准),可以是无效(以有限表示为准),可以是无效(以有限表示为准),可以是无效(以有限表 本章或本章)
Code 128 Transmit Function Characters on page 379	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
Convert Code 128 to Code 39 on page 380	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
Code 128 Label ID on page 381	#	K	B	3	#
Code 128 Length Control on page 382	Variable Variable Variable		Variable Variable Variable
Code 128 Length 1 on page 383	1	1	1	1	1	1
Code 128 Length 2 on page 384	80 80 80	80 80 80
Code 128 Correlation on page 385	Disable Disable Disable		Disable Disable Disable
Code 128 Stitching on page 386	Disable Disable Disable		Disable Disable Disable
Code 128 Minimum Reads on page 387	1	1	1	1	1	1
EAN-128 Enable on page 389	Disable Disable Disable		Disable Disable Disable
EAN-128 Label ID on page 390	None P None None
Interleaved 2 of 5 (1 2 of 5) Enable on page 391	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
1 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation on page 392	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
1 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission on page 393	Enable Enable	Enable Enable	Enable Enable	Enable
1 2 of 5 Label ID on page 394	i	I	B	2	i
1 2 of 5 Length Control on page 395	Variable Variable	Variable Variable	Variable Variable
1 2 of 5 Length 1 on page 396	6	6	6	6	6	6
1 2 of 5 Length 2 on page 397	50 50 50	50 50 50
1 2 of 5 Correlation on page 398	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
1 2 of 5 Stitching on page 399	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
1 2 of 5 Minimum Reads on page 400	1	1	1	1	1	1
Standard 2 of 5 (Std 2 of 5) Enable on page 402	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation on page 403	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission on page 404	Enable Enable	Enable Enable	Enable Enable	Enable
Standard 2 of 5 Label ID on page 405	S	H	S	S
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control on page 406	Variable Variable Variable		Variable Variable Variable
Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 on page 407	8	8	8	8	8	8
Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 on page 408	50 50 50 50 50 50
Standard 2 of 5 Correlation on page 409	Disable Disable Disable		Disable Disable Disable
Standard 2 of 5 Stitching on page 410	Disable Disable Disable		Disable Disable Disable
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads on page 411	1	1	1	1	1	1
Codabar Enable on page 413	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
Codabar Start Stop Character Transmission on page 414	Disable Enable	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
Codabar Start Stop Character Set on page 415	abcd/abcd	abcd/abcd	abcd/abcd	abcd/abcd	abcd/abcd	abcd/abcd
Codabar Start Stop Character Match on page 417	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
Codabar Check Character Calculation on page 418	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
Codabar Check Character Transmission on page 419	Enable Enable	Enable Enable	Enable Enable	Enable
Codabar Label ID on page 420	%	N	%	%
Codabar Require Quiet Zones on page 421	Enable Enable	Enable Enable	Enable Enable	Enable
Codabar Length Control on page 422	Variable Variable	Variable Variable	Variable Variable	Variable
Codabar Length 1 on page 423	3	3	3	3	3	3
Codabar Length 2 on page 424	50 50 50	50 50 50
Codabar Correlation on page 425	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
Codabar Stitching on page 426	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
Codabar Mini-mum Reads on page 427	1	1	1	1	1	1
Code 93 Enable on page 429	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable Disable	Disable
Code 93 Label ID on page 430	&	L	&	&
Code 93 Length Control on page 431	Variable Variable Variable		Variable Variable
Code 93 Length 1 on page 432	1	1	1	1	1	1
Code 93 Length 2 on page 433	50 50 50	50 50 50
Code 93 Correlation on page 434	Disable Disable		Disable Disable
Code 93 Stitching on page 435	Enable Enable Enable		Enable Enable
Code 93 Mini-mum Reads on page 436	1	1	1	1	1	1
MSI/Plessey Enable on page 438	Disable	Disable	Disable
MSI/Plessey Check Character Calculation on page 439	Enable	Enable	Enable
MSI/Plessey Number of Check Characters on page 440	1 check char	1 check char	1 check char	1 check char
MSI/Plessey Check Character Transmission on page 441	Enable	Enable	Enable
MSI/Plessey Label ID on page 442	@	0	@	@
MSI/Plessey Length Control on page 443	Variable	Variable	Variable
MSI/Plessey Length 1 on page 444	4	4	4	4
MSI/Plessey Length 2 on page 445	16 16 16 16
MSI/Plessey Correlation on page 446	Disable	Disable	Disable
MSI/Plessey Stitching on page 447	Disable	Disable	Disable
MSI/Plessey Minimum Reads on page 448	1	1	1	1

NOTES

Appendix G

Handheld Data Format Requirements

This appendix provides application notes to describe the general format of data that can be accepted by the scanner through the auxiliary port as transmitted from a handheld scanner.

Handheld Data Format Requirements General

• 9600 bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity.
• RTS is used to "bracket" the data received from the handheld: RTS must be asserted high during data transmission, and deasserted after label transmission is complete. No other flow control mechanisms are required or supported. The deassertion of the RTS signal must occur no later than 50 milliseconds from the complete transmission of the last character of the transmitted data.
• The time between character transmission can be no longer than 50 milliseconds.
• Symbologies requiring fixed lengths (UPC/EAN) will enforce length requirements for validation of the label.
• Handheld scanner will be required to transmit start and stop characters for Codabar and Code 39 labels.
• Appropriate industrial length requirements will be enforced (if configured) for validation of the label.
• Maximum label lengths will be enforced for label validation (i.e. labels longer than the maximum label size will not be validated).
• Standard Datalogic formats generally use a single prefix character. The specific formats are provided below.

Datalogic Handheld Data Format Requirements

The following sections describe label transmission formats that are typically observed in factory configurations of Datalogic handheld scanners.

DataBar Omnidirectional

• Prefix must be ASCII characters 'R4'
• Check character must be included in label
• Application identifier "01" must follow the prefix and precede the base label
• Label length excluding prefix characters must be 16 characters.
  • Example: 'R40101044123456789'

DataBar Expanded

• Prefix must be ASCII characters 'R4'
• Check character must be included in label

UPC-A

• System number must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' – total length including prefix must be 13.
  • Example: 'A060992011187'.

UPC-A with 2-Digit Supplemental

• System number must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' – total length including prefix must be 15.
  • Example: 'A06099201118712'.

UPC-A with 5-Digit Supplemental

• System number must be included in label data
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' – total length including prefix must be 18
  • Example: 'A06099201118712345'

UPC-A with Code 128 Supplemental

• System number must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' – total length including prefix must be greater or equal to 19 Code 128 Supplemental codes are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters).
• Characters immediately following base label must be of the form '8100', '8101' or '8102'.
  • Example: 'A0609920111878100000951'.

UPC-E

• System number must be included in label data
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' – total length including prefix must be 9
  • Example: 'E09988750'

UPC-E with 2-Digit Supplemental

• System number must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' – total length including prefix must be 11.
  • Example: 'E0998875012'.

UPC-E with 5-Digit Supplemental

• System number must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' – total length including prefix must be 14.
  • Example: 'E0998875012345'.

UPC-E with Code 128 Supplemental

• System number must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' – total length including prefix must be greater or equal to 15 (code 128 Supplemental codes are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters).
• Characters immediately following base label must be of the form '8100', '8101' or '8102'.
  • Example: 'E099887508101000951'.

EAN-8

• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct
• Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' – total length including prefix must be 10
  • Example: 'FF00210126'

EAN-8 with 2-Digit Supplemental

• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' – total length including prefix must be 12.
  • Example: 'FF0021012612'.

EAN-8 with 5-Digit Supplemental

• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' – total length including prefix must be 15.
  • Example: 'FF0021012612345'.

EAN-8 with Code 128 Supplemental

• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' – total length including prefix must be greater than 16 (code 128 Supplemental codes are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters).
• Characters immediately following base label must be of the form '8100', '8101' or '8102'.
  • Example: 'FF002101268102000951'.

EAN-13

• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'– total length including prefix must be 14
  • Example: 'F1101234567891'

EAN-13 with 2-Digit Supplemental

• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct
  • Supplemental data is appended to base label
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'– total length including prefix must be 16
  • Example: 'F110123456789112'

EAN-13 with 5-Digit Supplemental

• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'– total length including prefix must be 19.
  • Example: 'F110123456789112345'.

EAN-13 with Code 128 Supplemental

• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct
• Supplemental data is appended to base label
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'– total length including prefix must be greater or equal to 20 (code 128 Supplemental codes are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters)

- Characters immediately following base label must be of the form '8100', '8101' or '8102'

• Example: 'F11012345678918100000951'

Code 39

- Check character must be included in label data.

- Label length including start, stop and check characters and excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.

- Start and stop characters "*" must be included in label.

- Prefix must be an ASCII character '*'

• Example : '**Code 39.TEST*'.

Code 39-Pharmacode

- Check character must be included in label data.

- Label length including start, stop and check characters and excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.

- Start and stop characters "*" must be included in label.

- Prefix must be an ASCII character 'p'.

• Example: 'p*123456789*'.

12 of 5

- Check character must be included in label data.

- Label length including check characters and excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.

- Prefix must be an ASCII character 'i'.

• Example: 'i0123456789'.

Standard 2 of 5

• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check characters and excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 's'.
  • Example: 's0123456789'.

Codabar

• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character '%'.
• Start stop character sets must meet the matching requirement set forth by the scanner configuration item Codabar Start Stop Character Match.
• Start stop character sets must be of the form ABCD/ABCD and must be included in the label.
  • Example: '%s\$99.95s' (the lower case 's' at each end of the example is a placeholder for the start stop character set).

Code 128

• Prefix must be an ASCII character '#'.
• Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Function characters may be transmitted as a hexadecimal value 8x. Where x correlates to function characters 1 thru 4 as follows:
• x80 = function code 1
• x81 = function code 2
• x82 = function code 3
  • x83 = function code 4
• For Code 128 programming labels the format is of the general form '#/82nnnnn/r' - /82 is hexadecimal 82 and /r is carriage return.
  • Example: '#Code_128.Test'.

MSI/Plessey

• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character '@'.
  • Example: '@144769254'.

Code 93

• Prefix must be an ASCII character '&'.
• Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
  • Example: '&Code93-test'.

AIM Formats

AIM specifies a 3-character string that is attached as a prefix to the label data for transmission. Because AIM specifies one identifier for UPC-A, UPC-E and EAN-13 labels, UPC-A, UPC-E and EAN-13 will be received from the handheld and transmitted to the POS by the scanner as EAN-13. Using this form of identification, the ''] character must be the first character in the label received from the handheld. Further identification of the label is specified in the section below. The AIM identifiers on the received label may or may not be transmitted to the POS and are controlled according to the data formatting settings of the scanner.

The following sections describe the prefix strings and identify what specific label characteristics can be supported.

If a label does not have one of the AIM identifiers specified below and the first three characters of the label data fit the following qualifications:

• the first character is a ']'
• the second character is a capital letter or a small letter
  • the third character is a digit

...then the label is transmitted to the host with the AIM identifier still appended to the beginning of the label data.

UPC-A

• AIM does not specify UPC-A as a separate symbology using this transmission format – labels will be transmitted as EAN-13.
  • Example: 'E00060992011187'.

UPC-E

• AIM does not specify UPC-E as a separate symbology using this transmission format – labels will be transmitted as EAN-13.
  • Example: 'E00000000998875'.

EAN-13

• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters 'E0'– total length including prefix must be 16.
  • Example: 'E01101234567891'.

EAN-8

• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters 'E4' – total length including prefix must be 11.
  • Example: 'E400210126'.

2-Digit Supplemental

• Supplemental data is appended to any EAN base label.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters 'E1'.
• length of Supplemental data including prefix must be 5. Total required length is 21 for EAN-13 and 16 for EAN-8.
• Prefix for the main body portion of the label for UPCA/UPCE/EAN13 can be ]E0 or ]E3.
• If the main body prefix for UPCA/UPCE/EAN13 is ]E0, then the 2-digit addon portion of the label must have a prefix of ]E1.

Examples: addon portion is highlighted data is underlined.

UPC-A 2-Digit addon	'E00060992011187]E112'
UPC-E 2-Digit addon	'E00000000998875]E112'
EAN-8 2-Digit addon	'E400210126]E112'
EAN-13 2-Digit addon	'E01101234567891]E112'
UPC-A ]E3006099201	118712
UPC-E ]E3000000099	887512
EAN-13 ]E311012345	6789112

5-Digit Supplemental

• Supplemental data is appended to any EAN base label.
- Prefix must be ASCII characters 'E2'.
- Length of supplemental data including prefix must be 8. Total required length is 24 for EAN-13 and 19 for EAN-8.
- Prefix for the main body portion of the label for UPCA/UPCE/EAN13 can be ]E0 or ]E3.
- If the main body prefix for UPCA/UPCE/EAN13 is ]E0, then the 5-digit addon portion of the label must have a prefix of ]E2.

Examples: addon portion is highlighted data is underlined.

UPC-A 5-Digit addon	'E00060992011187]E212345'
UPC-E 5-Digit addon	'E00000000998875]E212345'
EAN-8 5-Digit addon	'E400210126]E212345'
EAN-13 5-Digit addon	'E01101234567891]E212345'
UPC-A ]E3006099201	118712345
UPC-E ]E3000000099	887512345
EAN-13 ]E311012345	6789112345

Code 39

• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including start, stop and check characters and excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Start and stop characters "*" must be included in label.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters 'A0' or 'A1'.
  • Example: '*]A0Code 39.TEST*'.

Codabar

• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters 'F0'.
• Start stop character sets must meet the matching requirement set forth by the scanner configuration item Codabar Start Stop Character Match.
• Start stop character sets s must be of the form ABCD/ABCD and must be included in the label.
  • Example: 'F0s\$99.95s' (the lower case 's' at each end of the example is a placeholder for the start stop character set).

MSI/Plessey

• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']M0'.
  • Example: 'M0144769254'.

Code 93

• Prefix must be ASCII characters 'G0'.
• Label length excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
  • Example : 'G0Code93-test'.

DataBar Omnidirectional

• Prefix must be ASCII characters 'e0'.
• Check character must be included in label.
• Label length excluding prefix characters must be 14 characters.
  • Example: 'e001044123456789'.

DataBar Expanded

• Prefix must be ASCII characters 'e0'.
• Label length excluding prefix characters must be at least 1 character. Maximum length is the maximum label size supported by the scanner.
  • Example: 'e001900123456789083103001750'.

12 of 5

• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check characters and excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters 'I0', 'I1' or 'I2' (other prefixes specify different check character properties which are not supported).
  • Example: 'I10123456789'.

Standard 2 of 5

• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check characters and excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'JS0' (other prefixes specify different check character properties which are not supported).
  • Example: 'S00123456789'.

Code 128 / EAN128

• Prefix must be either ASCII characters 'C0', 'C1' or 'C2'.
• Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• If EAN-128 Symbology is Enabled and prefix is 'C1', label will be identified as an EAN128 otherwise it is identified as a Code 128.
• A prefix of 'C0' designates that no function code is present in the 1st or 2nd character position.
• A prefix of 'JC2' designates that a function code 1 is present in the 2nd character.
  • Example : ']C0Code_128.Test'.

NOTES

ASCII Character Set

The table on this page shows ASCII characters and their corresponding Hex Values. The Hex Values in this table are needed for setting symbology-specific label identifiers, as well as enabling custom prefix and suffix characters.

ASCII Char.	Hex No.	ASCII Char.	Hex No.	ASCII Char.	Hex No.	ASCII Char.	Hex No.
NUL	00	SP	20	@	40	'	60
SOH	01	!	21	A	41	a	61
STX	02	'	22	B	42	b	62
ETX	03	#	23	C	43	c	63
EOT	04	$	24	D	44	d	64
ENQ	05	%	25	E	45	e	65
ACK	06	&	26	F	46	f	66
BEL	07	'	27	G	47	g	67
BS	08	(	28	H	48	h	68
HT	09	)	29	I	49	i	69
LF	0A	*	2A	J	4A	j	6A
VT	0B	+	2B	K	4B	k	6B
FF	0C	,	2C	L	4C	l	6C
CR	0D	-	2D	M	4D	m	6D
SO	0E	.	2E	N	4E	n	6E
SI	0F	/	2F	O	4F	o	6F
DLE	10	0	30	P	50	p	70
DC1	11	1	31	Q	51	q	71
DC2	12	2	32	R	52	r	72
DC3	13	3	33	S	53	s	73
DC4	14	4	34	T	54	t	74
NAK	15	5	35	U	55	u	75
SYN	16	6	36	V	56	v	76
ETB	17	7	37	W	57	w	77
CAN	18	8	38	X	58	x	78
EM	19	9	39	Y	59	y	79
SUB	1A	:	3A	Z	5A	z	7A
ESC	1B	;	3B	[	5B	{	7B
FS	1C	<	3C	\	5C	|	7C
GS	1D	=	3D	]	5D	}	7D
RS	1E	>	3E	^	5E	~	7E
US	1F	?	3F	_	5F	DEL	7F

© 2006-2017 Datalogic S.p.A. and its Group companies • All rights reserved. • Protected to the fullest extent under U.S. and international laws. • Copying or altering of this document is prohibited without express written consent from Datalogic S.p.A. • Datalogic and the Datalogic logo are registered trademarks of Datalogic S.p.A. in many countries, including the U.S. and the E.U.

DATALOGIC

www.datalogic.com

Datalogic USA, Inc.

959 Terry Street | Eugene | OR 97402 | USA

Telephone: [phone] | Fax: [phone]